01.02.

2023

12.01.2023

Principles of Management and Organisational Behaviour

Course Code 22MBA11 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50

Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100

Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Objectives: This course will enable the students

 To understand theories and models of Management and OB.

 To classify and differentiate between various methods of problem solving.
 To compile an adept framework for solving the problems at the workplace.
 To acquaint the students with industry relevant skill sets.
Module-1 (8 Hours)

Introduction: Meaning, Objectives, Differences between Administration and Management, Levels of

Management, Kinds of Managers, Managerial roles, History of Management, Recent trends in
Management.
Module-2 (9 Hours)

Planning: Importance, Process, Benefits of Planning, Types of Plans, Planning tools and techniques.
Organising: Meaning, Types of Organisation structures, Traditional structures, Directions in
organisation structures.
Leading: Meaning, Nature, Traits and Behaviour, Contingency approaches to Leadership,
Transformational leadership.
Controlling: Meaning, Importance, Steps in the control process, Types of Control.

Module-3 (9 Hours)

Organisational Behaviour: Introduction, Meaning, History of Organisational Behaviour,

Organisational effectiveness, Organisational learning process, Stakeholders, Contemporary challenges
for Organisations.
Module-4 (9 Hours)

Behavioural Dynamics: MARS Model of individual behaviour and performance, Types of

Individual behaviour, Personality in Organisation, Values in the work place, Types of values,
Perception, Meaning, Model of Perceptual process. Emotions in work place, Types of emotions,
Circumplex Model of Emotion, Attitudes and Behaviour, Work-related stress and its management.
Motivation, Meaning, Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, Four Drive Theory of Motivation.

Module-5 (9 Hours)

Teams: Advantages of Teams, Model of Team Effectiveness, Stages of Team Development. Power ,
Meaning, Sources, and Contingencies of Power, Consequences of Power.

Module-6 (7 Hours)
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Culture: Meaning, Elements of Organisational Culture, Importance of Organisational Culture.

Organisational Change , Meaning, Resistance to change, Approaches to Organisational Culture,
Action Research Approach, Appreciative Inquiry Approach, Large Group Intervention Approach,
Parallel Learning Structure Approach, and Ethical issues of Organisational Behaviour.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books

1. MGMT ,Chuck Williams & Manas Ranjan Tripathy, 5/e, Cengage Learning, 2013.
2. Organizational Behavior,Steven L. McShane & Mary Ann Von Glinow, 6/e, McGraw Hill
Education, 2015.
3. Management & Organisational Behaviour , Laurie J. Mullins, 7/e, Prentice Hall, 2005.
4. Essentials of Management , Koontz, McGraw Hill, 8/e, 2014.
5. Management, John R. Schermerhorn, Jr., 8/e, Wiley India, 2010.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

6. Organizational Behaviour, Fred Luthans, 12/e, McGraw Hill International, 2011.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mg104/preview
 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mg78/preview
 https://learninglink.oup.com/access/king-lawley3e-student-resources#tag_all-chapters
 https://openstax.org/details/books/organizational-behavior
 https://www.classcentral.com/course/introduction-organisational-behaviour-11892

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Visit an Organisation and note the various functions discharged in a day.
 Conduct a professional event in the department and try to understand the various roles played
by students in relation to Team and Organisational environment.
 Develop questions, interact with people in the Organisation and try to observe personality
traits.
 Meet any Leader / HoD / Dean and observe the Management of various departments and
record the changes in administrative pattern.
Course outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Gain practical experience in the field of Management and Organisational L1
Behaviour.
CO2 Acquire conceptual knowledge of management, various functions of L3
Management and theories in OB.
CO3 Comprehend and apply management and behavioural models to relate L2
attitude, perception and personality.
CO4 Analyse the recent trends in Management and OB models. L4

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT
Course Code 22MBA12 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial qualities and motivation among students.
 To impart basic entrepreneurial skills and understandings to run a business efficiently and
effectively.
 To provide insights to students on entrepreneurship opportunities, sources of funding and
institutions supporting entrepreneurs.
 To make students understand the ways of starting a company of their own.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to Entrepreneur & Entrepreneurship: Meaning of entrepreneur - Evolution of the
concept - Functions of an Entrepreneur - Types of Entrepreneurs - Intrapreneur- an emerging class -
Concept of Entrepreneurship -Entrepreneurial Culture - Stages in entrepreneurial process.
Creativity and Innovation: The role of creativity , The innovation Process , Sources of New Ideas ,
Methods of Generating Ideas , Creative Problem Solving , Entrepreneurial Process.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Developing Business Model: Importance of Business Model , Starting a small-scale industry -
Components of an Effective Business Model, Osterwalder Business Model Canvas.
Business Planning Process: Meaning of business plan - Business plan process - Advantages of
business planning - Final Project Report with Feasibility Study - preparing a model project report for
starting a new venture.
Lab Component and assignment: Designing a Business Model Canvas
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Managing and Growing New Venture: Preparing for the new venture launch - early management
decisions, Managing early growth of the new venture- new venture expansion strategies and issues.
Getting Financing or Funding for the New Venture: Estimating the financial needs of a new venture
and preparation of a financial plan, Sources of Personal Financing, Preparing to Raise Debt or
Equity Financing, Business Angels, Venture Capital, Initial Public Offering, Commercial Banks,
Other Sources of Debt Financing, Leasing. Forms of business organization: Sole Proprietorship ,
Partnership , Limited liability partnership - Joint Stock Companies and Cooperatives.
Module-4 (9 Hours)
Entrepreneurship Development and Government: Role of Central Government and State
Government in promoting Entrepreneurship - Introduction to various incentives, subsidies and grants
- Export Oriented Units - Fiscal and Tax concessions available- Start Up India scheme. Women
Entrepreneurs, Reasons for low women Entrepreneurs, Prospects for Women Entrepreneurs,
Strategies to motivate entrepreneurship amongst women.
Institutions supporting Entrepreneurs: A brief overview of financial institutions in India - SIDBI -
NABARD - IDBI - SIDCO - Indian Institute of Entrepreneurship - DIC - Single Window - Latest
Industrial Policy of Government of India.
Module-5 (7 Hours)
Process of Company Incorporation; process of registration of a private limited company, a public
limited company, a partnership; Characteristics of a limited liability partnership; Four stages of Start
Up, Intellectual property protection and Ethics: Patents , Copyright - Trademark- Geographical
indications , Ethical and social responsibility and challenges.
Module-6 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Emerging Trends in Entrepreneurship Development; Digital Entrepreneurship , meaning, scope and

opportunities.Social Entrepreneur , Meaning of Social Entrepreneur, Motivation for a Social
Entrepreneur; Supporting and Evaluating Social Entrepreneurship in India. Rural Entrepreneur ,
Meaning of Rural Entrepreneur, Potential opportunities for Rural entrepreneurship in India

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources: Books

1. The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management, Vasant Desai, Himalaya
Publishing House, 2010.
2. Entrepreneurship, Donald F. Kuratko and Richard M. Hodgetts, South-Western, 2012.
3. Entrepreneurship Development, Gupta S.L., Arun Mittal, International Book House, 2012.
4. Management and Entrepreneurship Development, Sudha G. S, Indus Valley Publication, 2009
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
 https://youtu.be/rbmz5VEW90A
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CnStAWc7iOw
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RLQivEQUgUc
Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Make a business plan for your intended business, talk to bankers to find out what they look for
in a business plan, modify accordingly and present it in the class.
 Practical Component: Discuss the characteristics and strategies adopted by new age modern
entrepreneurs/ Unicorns/startups who changed the market scenario with their innovations
(minimum 5 entrepreneurs)
 Analyse the performance of listed family firms. How is their performance compared to the
performance of other firms? Does a family firm successfully manage to create wealth for non-
family investors?
 Interview a local entrepreneur to find out his/her major motivations to start a business, which
of the skills and characteristics do you find in the entrepreneur?
 Study a local for-profit business and try to list out the positive social impact of the business.
 Visit a trade show and try to compare the marketing activities of various stalls in that show,
make a list of good practices you come across in the show.

Course outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Display keen interest and orientation towards entrepreneurship, L6
entrepreneurial opportunity Modules in order to setup a business and to
think creatively.
CO2 To know about the various business models and B-Plans across Business L3
sectors.
CO3 Able to understand the importance of marketing and different forms of L2
businesses.
CO4 Become aware about various sources of funding and institutions supporting L4
entrepreneurs.
CO5 Awareness about legal aspects and ways to protect the ideas. L2

CO6 To understand the ways of starting a business and to know how to foster L3
their ideas.

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 2 3 1 1
CO2 1 2 2 2
CO3 1 1 2
CO4 1 1
CO5 1 3 1 3
CO6 1 1 2
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Accounting for Managers

Course Code 22MBA13 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To enable the students to understand the conceptual framework of accounting, reporting and
financial statements.
 To enable the students in preparation of books of accounts and accounting records leading to
final accounts and interpretation there-off.
 To acquaint the students with interpretation of accounting information and analyses of financial
statements for decision making.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to Accounting: Meaning and objectives, Need and Types of Accounting, Single Entry
System, Double Entry System, Basics of Generally Accepted accounting Principles (GAAP) , IFRS,
Indian Accounting Standards. Concepts and Conventions of Accounting. (Theory only)
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Accounting Cycle: Journal, Ledgers, Trial balance, Accounting equation, Users of Accounting
information, subsidiary books including cash book with two and three column cashbook only.
(Theory and Problems).
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Final Accounts of companies: Preparation of final accounts of companies in vertical form as per
Companies Act of 2013 (Problems of Final Accounts with adjustments), Window dressing. Case
Study problem on Final Accounts of Company-Appropriation accounts. (Theory and Problems).
Module-4 (9 Hours)
Analysis of Financial Statements: Meaning and Purpose of Financial Statement Analysis, Trend
Analysis, Comparative Analysis, Financial Ratio Analysis, Preparation of Financial Statements using
Financial Ratios, Case Study on Financial Ratio Analysis. Preparation of Cash flow Statement
(indirect method). Lab compulsory for Financial Statement Analysis using Excel.
(Theory and Problems).
Module-5 (6 Hours)
Bank Reconciliation statement: Rules for recording Receipts and Payments in cash book and bank
pass book, reasons for differences in the balances of cash book and bank pass book. Meaning and
Preparation of Bank reconciliation statement with Tally. (Theory and Problems).
Module-6 (10 Hours)
Depreciation and Emerging Issues in Accounting: Depreciation: Meaning, characteristics and
causes of depreciation, Types of Depreciation. Tax implication of depreciation. (Problems only on
straight line and WDV method).
Direct Taxation: Basic Concepts and definitions, Capital and revenue – receipts, expenditures, Basis of
charge and scope of total income, Tax Planning, Tax Evasion and Tax Management, (Theory Only).
Emerging Issues in Accounting: Human Resource Accounting, Forensic Accounting, Green
Accounting, Sustainability Reporting. (Theory only).
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problems in the SEE.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Financial Accounting: A Managerial Perspective, Narayanaswamy R, 5/e, PHI, 2014.
2. A Text book of Accounting For Management, Maheswari S. N, Maheswari Sharad K.
Maheswari , 2/e, Vikas Publishing house (P) Ltd.
3. Computerized Accounting, Neeraj Goyal, Rohit Sachdeva, Kalyani Publishers, 1e, 2018.
4. Accounting for Management-Text & Cases, S.K.Bhattacharya & John Dearden, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 3e, 2018.
5. Accounting and Finance for Non-finance Managers, Jai Kumar Batra, Sage Publications, 1e,
2018.
6. Financial Accounting, Jain S. P and Narang K L, Kalyani Publishers.
7. Direct Taxes Law and practice, Vinod Singhania and Kapil Singhania, Taxman Publications.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

12.01.2023

 https://icmai.in/upload/Students/Syllabus2016/Inter/Paper-5New.pdf
 https://journals.sagepub.com/home/jaf
 https://icmai.in/upload/Students/Syllabus-2012/Study_Material_New/Inter-Paper5-
Revised.pdf
 https://books.mec.biz/tmp/books/Y3BMTIHRR2UE7LMTZG3T.pdf
 https://drnishikantjha.com/booksCollection/Financial%20Accounting%20-%20BMS%20.pdf
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/accountancy-books.html
 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/nou22_cm18/preview
 https://www.coursera.org/lecture/uva-darden-financial-accounting/what-is-accounting-eXQEc
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mq6KNVeTE3A

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 To collect Annual reports of the companies and analyze the financial statements using
different techniques and presenting the same in the class.
 To analyze the companies’ cash flow statements and presenting the same in the class.
 To get exposed to use of accounting software (preferably Tally or ERP).
 To identify the sustainability report of a company and study the contents.

Course outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Know what and how books of accounts and financial statements are L1
prepared. .
CO2 How to interpret financial statements of companies for decision making. L1
CO3 Independently undertake financial statement analysis and take decisions. L4,L6

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO

1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2

CO3 3 2
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

STATISTICS FOR MANAGERS

Course Code 22MBA14 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week 4:0:0
SEE Marks 50
(L:P:SDA)
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
1. To facilitate the students to compute the various measures of central tendency and dispersion using
descriptive statistics.
2. To enhance the skills to visualize and estimate the relationship between variables using correlation
and regression analysis.
3. To equip with the skills of decision-making using probability techniques.
4. To empower with the knowledge of trend analysis.
5. To make the students understand the procedure of hypothesis testing using appropriate parametric
and non-parametric tests.
6. To familiarize the students with analytical package SPSS.

Module-1 (8 Hours)
Introduction to Statistics: Meaning and Definition, Importance, Types, Measures of Central
Tendency -Arithmetic mean, Geometric mean, Harmonic mean, Median, Quartiles, Deciles,
Percentiles, Mode. Measures of Dispersion -Range, Quartile deviation, Mean deviation, Standard
deviation, Variance, Coefficient of Variation. (Theory and Problem).
Module-2: (7 Hours)
Correlation and Regression: Correlation - Significance, Types, and Methods, Scatter diagram,
Karl Pearson correlation, Spearman’s Rank correlation, Regression, Significance, Linear
Regression Analysis, Types of regression models, Lines of Regression. (Theory and Problem).
Module-3: (9 Hours)
Probability Distribution: Concept of probability, Counting rules for determining number of
outcomes - Permutation and Combination, Rules of probability- Addition and Multiplication,
Baye’s Theorem. Concept of Probability Distribution, Theoretical Probability Distributions -
Binomial, Poisson, Normal (Problems only on Binomial, Poisson and Normal). (Theory and
Problem).
Module-4: (8 Hours)
Time Series Analysis: Objectives, Variations in Time Series. Measurement of Trend, Graphic
Method, Moving Average Method, Semi-Average Method, Least Square Method. Measurement of
Seasonal Variations- Method of Simple Averages, Ratio to Trend Method-Ratio to Moving Average
Method, Link Relative Method. (Theory and Problem).

Module-5 : (8 Hours)
Hypotheses Testing: Definition, Types, Procedure for testing, Errors in hypotheses testing.
Parametric and Non-Parametric Tests -t-test, z-test, f-test, Chi-square test, u-test, K-W Test (problems
on all tests).Analysis of Variance (theory only).

Module-6: (10 Hours)

Computer lab for Statistics: SPSS: Overview of SPSS, Creating, saving and editing files, Importing
files from other formats. Transforming Variables - Compute, Multiple responses. Organization and
Presentation of Information - Measures of Central Tendency and Variability, Frequency Distributions.
Charts and Graphs, Hypotheses testing using means and cross-tabulation, Paired t, Independent
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

sample t, Chi- square. Correlation, Regression Analysis, Linear, Logistic, Analysis of Variance- One
Way ANOVA, ANOVA in regression.
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problems.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. S C Gupta (2018), Fundamentals of Statistics, 7th edition Himalaya Publications.
2. J K Sharma (2020), Business Statistics 5th edition Vikas Publishing House.
3. S P Gupta (2021), Statistical Methods 46th edition Sultan Chand Publications.
4. C R Kothari (2015), Research Methodology- Methods and Techniques, Viswa Prakasam
Publications.
5. William E. Wagner, III (2015), Using IBM SPSS- Statistics for Research Methods and Social
Science Statistics 5th edition Sage Publications.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

12.01.2023

 Students should opt Swayam NPTEL Course on Business Statistics offered by Prof.
M.K.Barua Dept. of Management studies IIT Roorkee.
 YouTube Videos are also available of the same
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VDLyk6z8uCg
 Swayam NPTEL Course on Business Statistics by Dr. P. M. Shiv Prasad, Department of
Commerce, Teresian College, Mysuru.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Role Play Techniques
 Quizzes
 Field Surveys
 Assignments
Course outcome (Course Skill Set)

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand how to organize, manage, and present the data L2
CO2 Use and apply a wide variety of specific statistical tools L3
CO3 Understand the applications of probability in business L4
CO4 Effectively interpret the results of statistical analysis L5
CO5 Develop competence of using computer packages to solve the problems L6

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
CO5 2 3
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Course Code 22MBA15 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To make students understand the fundamental concepts of marketing and environment in
which marketing system operates.
 To gain knowledge on consumer buying behaviour and influencing factors
 To describe major bases for segment marketing, target marketing, and market positioning.
 To develop a Conceptual framework, covering basic elements of the marketing mix.
 To understand fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies and hands on
practical approach.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to Marketing: Importance of marketing, Definitions of market and marketing, Types
of Needs, Elements of Marketing Concept, Functions of Marketing, evolution of marketing,
Marketing V/s Selling, Customer Value and Satisfaction, 4P’s of Marketing, Marketing Environment,
Techniques used in environment analysis, Characteristics (Micro and Macro), Marketing to the 21st
century customer.

Module-2 (9 Hours)
Analysing Consumer Behaviour: Meaning and Characteristics, Importance of consumer behaviour,
Factors influencing Consumer Behaviour, Consumer characteristics influencing buying behaviour
personal factors and cultural factors. Consumer Buying Decision Process, Buying Roles, Buying
Motives. The black box model of consumer behaviour. Psychological factors consumer.

Module-3 (9 Hours)
Product management and Pricing: Importance and primary objective of product management,
product levels, product hierarchy, Classification of products, product mix, product mix strategies,
Managing Product Life Cycle. New Product Development, packing as a marketing tool, Role of
labeling in packing. Concept of Branding, Brand Equity, branding strategies, selecting logo, brand
extension- effects. Introducing to pricing, Significance of pricing, factor influencing pricing (Internal
factor and External factor), objectives, Pricing Strategies-Value based, Cost based, Market based,
Competitor based, Pricing Procedure.
Module-4 (9 Hours)
Distribution and Promotion: Roles and purpose of Marketing Channels, Factors Affecting Channel
Choice, Channel Design, Channel Management Decision, Channel Conflict, Designing a physical
Distribution System. Promotions- Marketing communications- Integrated Marketing Communications
(IMC)-communication objectives, steps in developing effective communication. Advertising:
Advertising Objectives, Advertising Budget, Advertising Copy, AIDA model, Traditional Vs Modern
Media- Online and Mobile Advertising, social media for Advertising. Push-pull strategies of
promotion.

Module-5 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Market segmentation, Targeting and Brand Positioning: Concept of Market Segmentation,

Benefits, Requisites of Effective Segmentation, Bases for Segmenting Consumer Markets, Market
Segmentation Strategies. Types of Segmentation. Targeting - Bases for identifying target Customer
target Marketing strategies, Positioning - Meaning, Tasks involved in Positioning. Monitoring brands
performance and positioning. Product Differentiation Strategies.

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Emerging Trends in Marketing: Marketing Planning. Concepts of B2B marketing, Service
Marketing, Digital and social media Marketing, Green Marketing, Event Marketing, Marketing Audit,
Sponsorship, Cause Related Marketing, Marketing for Non-Profit Organizations, Relationship
marketing, Marketing Strategies for Leaders, Challengers, Followers and Startups. Social
Responsibility of marketing, Neuro Marketing, Sensory Marketing, societal marketing concept,
premiumization.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Marketing Management- Indian Context, Global Perspective by Ramaswamy & Namakumari
by SAGE publication, 6th Edition.
2. Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective by Kotler, Keller, Koshy & Jha by
Pearson publication, Latest Edition.
3. New Product Management by Merle Crawford and Anthony Di Benedetto by McGraw-Hill,
Latest Edition.
4. Advertisement Brands & Consumer Behaviour by Ramesh Kumar by Sage Publications, 2020.
5. Marketing in India: Text and Cases by Neelamegham S by Vikas publication, Latest edition.
6. Marketing by Lamb, Hair, Mc Danniel by Cengage Learning, Latest edition.
7. Fundamentals of Marketing Management, Etzel M J BJ Walker & William J Stanton by Tata
Macgraw Hill, Latest edition.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://youtu.be/5fdx5Laavkc
 https://youtu.be/Ule8n6GgE1g
 https://youtu.be/ob5KWs3I3aY?t=131
 https://youtu.be/U1VWUHLhmdk
 https://youtu.be/iWuYUhSHXHg
 https://youtu.be/IErR_YYfP3Y
 https://youtu.be/mLV7MASrDlQ

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Sensitise the students to the market dynamics by visiting super markets and regulatory
markets like APMC, etc.
 Students to study the buying pattern based on demographics of consumers.
 Students to draft advertising copy.
 Students to take any FMCG product and study the PCL of that product.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Comprehend the concepts of Marketing Management. L1
CO2 Gain knowledge on consumer behaviour and buying process L3
CO3 Understand concept of Product and Brand Management, Branding and L2
Pricing strategies
CO4 Identify marketing channels and the concept of product distribution, L4
techniques of sales promotion
CO5 Simply ideas into a viable marketing plan for various modes of marketing L4

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 1 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
CO5 2 2
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Course Code 22MBA16 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To enable the students to become aware of their communication skills and sensitize them to their
potential to become successful managers.
 To enable learners with the mechanics of writing and also help them to draft business letters in
English precisely and effectively.
 To introduce the students to some of the practices in managerial communication those are in
vogue.
 To prepare students to develop the art of business communication with emphasis on analysing
business situations.
 To train Students towards drafting business proposals.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction: Meaning & Definition, Role, Classification, Purpose of communication,
Communication Process, Characteristics of successful communication, Importance of communication
in management, Communication structure in organization, Communication in conflict resolution,
Communication in crisis. Communication and negotiation, Communication in a cross-cultural setting,
Barriers to communication.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Oral Communication: Meaning, Principles of successful oral communication, Barriers to oral
communication, Conversation control, Reflection and Empathy: two sides of effective oral
communication. Modes of Oral Communication, Effectiveness of oral communication.
Listening as a Communication Skill: Approaches to listening, how to be a better listener, Process of
listening, Nonverbal communication: Meaning, classification.
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Written Communication: Purpose of writing, Clarity in writing, Principles of effective writing,
Approaching the writing process systematically: The 3X3 writing process for business
communication Pre writing, Writing, Revising. Audience analysis, Writing Positive, Neutral,
Persuasive and Bad-news Messages.
Types of Written Communication In Business: Business Letters: Introduction To Business Letters,
Types of Business Letters, Writing Routine And Persuasive Letters, Positive And Negative Messages
Writing, Employee Reviews, Recommendation Letters, Thank You Letters.
Module-4 (9 Hours)
Business Reports: Purpose, Kinds and Objectives of reports , Organization & Preparing reports,
short and long reports Writing Proposals: Structure & preparation , Writing memos, Media
Management:
The press release, Press conference, Media interviews.
Group Communication: Meetings, Planning meetings, objectives , participants , timing , venue of
meetings.
Meeting Documentation: Notice, Agenda and Resolution & Minutes.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
Case method of learning: Understanding the case method of learning , different types of cases ,
overcoming the difficulties of the case method , reading a case properly , case analysis approaches ,
analyzing the case , dos and don‘ts for case preparation.
Employment Communication: Introduction, Writing CVs, Group discussion, Interview skills.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Impact of Technological Advancement on Business Communication, Technology-enabled

Communication-Communication networks, Intranet, Internet, E-Mails, SMS, teleconferencing,
videoconferencing.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Presentation and Negotiation skills: Presentation: What is a presentation, Elements of
presentation, Designing & Delivering Business Presentations, Advanced Visual Support for
managers.
Negotiation skills: Definition of negotiation, Nature and need for negotiation, Factors affecting
negotiation, Stages of negotiation process, Negotiation strategies.
Etiquette Advantage in Managerial Communication: Meaning, types and advantages of Etiquette.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Business Communication: Concepts, Cases and Applications- Chaturvedi P. D, & Mukesh
Chaturvedi, 4/e, Pearson Education, 2020.
2. Communicating in Business: Ober and Newman, Cengage learning, 8th Edition, 2018.
3. Business Communication: Process and Product, Mary Ellen Guffey, 3/e, Cengage Learning,
2002.
4. Business and Professional Communication: Kelly M, Quintanilla, Shawn T and Wahl, SAGE
South Asia Edition, 2017.
5. Business Communication: Lesikar, Flatley, Rentz & Pande, 12/e, TMH, 2014.
6. Communicating in Business: Williams, Krizan, Logan and Merrier, Cengage Learning, 8/e,
2017.
7. Contemporary Business Communication - Scot Ober-Biztanntra, 5/e, 2015.
8. Advanced Business Communication, Penrose, Rasberry, Myers, 5/e, Cengage Learning, 2004.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yml9dx9nUco
 https://www.edx.org/learn/business-communications
 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/imb19_mg14/preview
 https://www.careers360.com/courses-certifications/swayam-communication-courses-brp-org
 https://dcomm.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/Business-Communication-PDFDrive.com-
.pdf
 http://www.mim.ac.mw/books/Business%20Communication.pdf
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/347508593_A_Practical_Book_of_Business_Comm
unication_A_Practical_Book_of_Business_Communication_Published_by
 https://2012books.lardbucket.org/pdfs/communication-for-business-success-canadian-
edition.pdf
 https://sagepub.libguides.com/c.php?g=964634&p=6968892
 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105052
 https://www.caclubindia.com/coaching/cseet-business-communication-ca-agrika-khatri-
online-classes-3476.asp

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Students enact and analyze the non-verbal cues.

 Demonstrating using Communication Equipments like Fax, Telex, Intercoms, etc.
 Demonstrating Video conferencing & teleconferencing in the class.
 Conduct a mock meeting of students in the class identifying an issue of their concern. The
students should prepare notice, agenda and minutes of the meeting.
 Each student to give presentation of 5 minutes (this can be spread throughout the semester)
and to be evaluated by the faculty.
 Organize a mock press conference addressing to the launch of new product by an
organization.
 Students should be given an assignment to draft a proposal to undertake research project.
01.02.2023

12.01.2023

Course outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 The students will be aware of their communication skills and know their L1
potential to become successful managers.
CO2 The students will get enabled with the mechanics of writing and can L3
compose the business letters in English precisely and effectively.
CO3 The students will be introduced to the managerial communication practices L2
in business those are in vogue.
CO4 Students will get trained in the art of drafting business proposals and L4
business communication with emphasis on analyzing business situations.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBA21 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives: The student will be able to
 Recite the theories and various functions of Human Resources Management
 Describe and explain in her/his own words, the relevance and importance of Human
Resources Management at workplace
 Apply and solve the workplace problems through Human Resources Management intervention
 Compare and contrast different approaches of HRM for solving the complex issues and
problems at the workplace
 Design and develop an original framework and model in dealing with the problems in the
organization.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction HRM: Introduction, meaning, nature, scope of HRM, Importance and Evolution of the
concept of HRM, Major functions of HRM, Principles of HRM. Human Resource Management and
Personnel Management, Models of Human Resource Management, HRM in India, The Factors
Influencing Human Resource Management, The HR Competencies, Human Resource Management
and Firm Performance.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
HR Planning: Importance of HR Planning, Manpower Planning to HR Planning, Factors Affecting
HR Planning, Benefits of HR Planning, HRP Process, Tools for Demand Forecasting, Attributes of an
Effective HR Planning, Barriers to HR Planning, The Challenges for HR, Process of Job Analysis,
Job Description and Job Evaluation.
Recruitment and Selection: Importance of Recruitment, Recruitment Policies, Factors Influencing
Recruitment, Recruitment Process, Sources, Evaluation of Recruitment Process, Recruitment
Strategy, Future Trends in Recruitment; Selection Process; Selection Tests; Factors Influencing
Selections.
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Performance Management and Appraisal: Objectives of Performance Management, Performance
Management and Performance Appraisal, Common Problems with Performance Appraisals,
Performance Management Process, Types of Performance Rating Systems, Future of Performance
Management.
Compensation and Benefits: Introduction, Definitions, Total Compensation, Total Rewards System,
Forms of Pay, External and Internal Factors, Establishing Pay Rates, Employee Benefits.
Industrial Relations: Decent Workplace, International Labour Organisation, Industrial Relations,
The Objectives of Industrial Relations, Approaches of Industrial Relations Systems, The Actors in
Industrial Relations, Indian Context, Industrial Relations and Human Resource Management.

Module-4 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Human Resource Management in Small and Medium Enterprises: Introduction to SMEs, The
Difference in Adoption of Human Resource Management, SMEs and Large Firms, Indian Experience,
Impact of Weak Adoption of Human Resource Management in SMEs,
Human Resource Management in the Service Sector: Introduction, The Emergence of the Services
Sector, Implications for Human Resource, Management Function, Differences Between Services
Sector and the Manufacturing Sector, Difference in Human Resource Management in Services and
Manufacturing Sectors, Human Resource Management and Service Quality Correlation, Trade
Unions in Services Sector, Models of Union Strategies.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
Human Resource Management and Innovations: Factors Affecting the Innovation Process in
organisations, Current Trends in Human Resource Management, Innovative Human Resource
Management Practices in India, Sustainable and innovative Human Resource Management.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Future trends in Human Resource Management: Hybrid work model, Employee skill
development, Internal mobility, Diversity and inclusion in workforce, People analytics, Employee
well-being, Multi-generational workforces and All-in-One HR tools.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Human Resource Management: Concepts authored by Amitabha Sengupta by Sage Publication
India Pvt. Ltd. 2019 edition
2. Human Resource Management: Theory and Practices authored by R. C. Sharma, Nipun Sharma
by Sage Publication India Pvt. Ltd., 2019 edition.
3. Leadership: Theory and Practices authored by Peter G. Northouse by Sage Publication,2016
edition.
4. Human Resources Management authored by T.P Renuka Murthy by HPH, 2015 edition.
5. The HR Scorecard: Linking People, Strategy, and Performance by Brian Becker, Dave Ulrich,
and Mark A. Huselid by Harvard Business School Press, 2001 edition.
6. The HR Answer Book: An Indispensable Guide for Managers and Human Resources
Professionals by Shawn Smith and Rebecca Mazin by AMACOM publishers, 2011 edition.
7. Performance Management and Appraisal Systems HR Tools for Global Competitiveness by T.
V. Rao, First edition 2004.
8. Human Resource Management by Appasaba L.V and Kadakol A M by College Book House,
2016 edition.
9. Human Resource Management by V.S.P Rao, 2014 edition.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://youtu.be/hHE4ilceiXs
 https://youtu.be/_d5QMwLC19Y
 https://youtu.be/uMQMDQI7Hpk
 https://youtu.be/vXgt9yASs_k
 https://youtu.be/pqtYQb9nbRk
 https://youtu.be/e1F3xnF5LKg
 https://youtu.be/4Kr0VpM14LI
Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Make students visit an organization and know the various HR roles in the organization
 Conduct mock interviews.
 Role play for acquainting and addressing HR challenges.
01.02.2023

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Understand and gain practical experience in the field of Human Resource L1
Concepts, functions and theories.
CO2 Acquire conceptual insight of Human Resource and various functions of L3
HR.
CO3 Apply personnel, managerial and welfare aspects of HR. L2
CO4 Perceive greater understanding about HR practices. L5
CO5 Perceive knowledge about the future trends in HRM L5

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO

1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 1 2 2
CO3 2 3 2
CO4 1 2 2 3
CO5 2 2
01.02.2023

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Course Code 22MBA22 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning Objectives:
 To familiarise the students with basic concepts of financial management and financial system.
 To understand the concept of time value of money and its implication.
 To evaluate investment proposals.
 To understand the management of working capital in an organization.
 To analyse the capital structure and dividend decision of an organisation
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction: Financial Management: Definition and scope- objectives of Financial Management-
role and functions of finance managers. Interface of Financial Management with other functional
areas. Indian Financial System: Structure-types-Financial markets- Financial Instruments -Financial
institutions and financial services- Non-Banking Financial Companies(NBFCs). Emerging areas in
Financial Management: Risk Management- Behavioural Finance- Financial Engineering- Derivatives
(Theory).
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Time value of money: Time value of money –Future value of single cash flow & annuity – Present
value and discounting-present value of single cash flow, annuity & perpetuity. Simple interest &
Compound interest - Capital recovery factor & equated annual instalments. (Theory & Problem).
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Long term sources of Finance & Cost of Capital: Shares- Debentures- Term loans and deferred
credit-Lease financing- Hybrid financing- Venture Capital-Angel investing- private equity- Crowd
funding (Theory Only). Cost of Capital: Basic concepts-Components and computation of cost of
capital- Cost of debentures- cost of term loans- cost of preferential capital-cost of equity (Dividend
discounting and CAPM model) - Cost of retained earnings - Determination of Weighted average cost
of capital (WACC) (Theory & Problem).
Module-4 (7 Hours)
Capital structure and Dividend Decisions: Capital structure– Planning the capital structure-
optimum capital structure- determination of capital structure- Governance of Equity and Debt-
Leverages- EBIT and EPS analysis-Return of Investment (ROI) &Return on Earnings ( ROE)
analysis.(Theory & Problem).
Dividend decisions & policies – Factors affecting the dividend policy – types of Dividend Policy-
forms of dividend-bonus issue-stock split (Theory only)

Module-5 (9 Hours)
Long term Investment Decisions (Capital Budgeting): Need and importance of capital budgeting
and its process-Techniques of capital budgeting – [Payback period, time adjusted payback period,
accounting rate of return , Net present value, Internal rate of return, Modified internal rate of return,
Profitability index method,). Capital Rationing. Estimation of cash flows for new projects and
replacement projects. (Theory & Problem).

Module-6 (9 Hours)
Working Capital Management: Sources of working capital- Factors influencing working capital
requirements - Current asset policy and current asset finance policy- Determination of operating cycle
and cash cycle - Estimation of working capital requirements of a firm. (Theory Only).
Case study on Working Capital Determination and the impact of negative working capital.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problem in SEE.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Financial Management: Text, Problems & Cases M.Y. Khan & P.K. Jain, TMH,7/e, 2017
2. Financial Management: Theory and Practice, Prasanna Chandra, TMH, 10/e, 2019
3. Financial Management Dr. G. Nagarajan & Dr. Binoy Mathew, Jayvee Digital
Publishing, 2/e, 2022
4. Financial Management, Prahlad Rathod, Babitha Thimmaiah and Harish Babu, HPH, 1/e,
2015.
5. Financial Management, I.M. Pandey, Vikas Publishing, 11/e.
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
01.02.2023

 https://www.pdfdrive.com/financial-management-and-analysis-workbook-step-by-step-exercises-and-tests-to-
help-you-master-financial-management-and-analysis-e158595305.html
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/fundamentals-of-financial-management-concise-sixth-edition-e20229517.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CCQwz_Gwo6o
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110107144/L01.html
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

• Identifying the small or medium sized companies and understanding the Investment evaluation
techniques used by them.
• Using the annual reports of selected companies, students can study the working capital
management employed by them. Students can also compare the working capital management of
companies in the same sector.
• Students can choose the companies that have gone for stock split and Bonus issue in the last few
years and study the impact of the same on the stock price.
• Students can study any five companies capital structure
• Students can do Company analysis for select companies using profitability and liquidity ratios.
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Understand the basic financial concepts L2
CO2 Apply time value of money L3
CO3 Evaluate the investment decisions L5
CO4 Estimate working capital requirements L4
CO5 Analyze the capital structure and dividend decisions L3

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 2 2 3

CO5 1 2 3
01.02.2023

Research Methodology and IPR

Course Code 22MBA23 CIE Marks 50

50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks

Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100

Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Learning objectives:

 To understand the basic components of research design
 To Gain an insight into the applications of research methods
 To equip students with various research analytical tools used in business research
 To provide the insights of IPR and IPR system in India

Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to Business Research: Meaning, types, process of research- management problem,
defining the research problem, formulating the research Hypothesis, developing the research
proposals, research design formulation, sampling design, planning and collecting the data for research,
data analysis and interpretation. Research Application in business decisions, Ethical issues in business
research. Features of a good research study.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Business Research Design: Meaning, types and significance of research design, errors affecting
research design.
Exploratory Research: Meaning, purpose, methods, Literature search, experience survey, focus
groups and comprehensive case methods.
Conclusive Research Design: Descriptive Research, Meaning, Types, Cross sectional studies and
longitudinal studies.
Experimental Research Design: Meaning and classification of experimental designs, formal and
informal, Pre experimental design, True experimental design, Quasi-experimental design, Statistical
experimental design.
Module-3 (7 Hours)
Sampling: Concepts, Types of Sampling, Probability Sampling: simple random sampling,
systematic sampling, stratified random sampling, cluster sampling,
Non Probability Sampling: convenience sampling- judgmental sampling, snowball sampling, quota
sampling, Errors in sampling.
Module-4 (9 Hours)
Data Collection: Meaning, types, Data collection methods: Observations, survey and interview
techniques, Questionnaire design: Meaning, process of designing questionnaire. Qualitative
Techniques of data collection Secondary data Sources: advantages and disadvantages.
Measurement and Scaling Techniques: Basic measurement scales-Nominal scale, Ordinal scale, Interval
scale, Ratio scale. Attitude measurement scale - Likert Scale, Semantic Differential Scale, Thurston scale,
Multi-Dimensional Scaling: Non comparative scaling techniques

Module-5 (9 Hours)
Data Analysis and Report Writing: Editing, Coding, Classification, Tabulation, Validation.
Analysis and Interpretation, Report writing and presentation of results, Importance of report writing,
types of research reports, Report structure, Guidelines for effective documentation.
Module-6 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Intellectual Property Rights: Meaning and Concepts of Intellectual Property, Nature and Characteristics of
Intellectual Property, Origin and Development of Intellectual Property, Kinds of Intellectual Property,
Intellectual Property System in India, IPRs- Invention and Creativity- Intellectual Property-Importance and
Protection of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)- A brief summary of: Patents, Copyrights, Trademarks,
TRIPS and TRIMS , Industrial Designs- Integrated Circuits-Geographical Indications-Establishment of WIPO-
Application and Procedures.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25 Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 100 Percent theory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Research Methodology: C R Kothari, Viswa Prakasam Publication, 2014.
2. Business Research Methods: Donald R. Cooper & Pamela s Schindler, TMH/9e/2007
3. Business Research Methods : S. N. Murthy & U. Bhojanna, Excel Books, 3e, 2016
4. Research Methods: M M Munshi & K Gayathri Reddy, HPH, 2015.
5. Intellectual Property Rights. India, IN: Neeraj, P., & Khusdeep, D. (2014). PHI learning
Private Limited.
6. David I. Bainbridge, Intellectual Property, Longman, 9th Edition, 2012.
7. Intellectual Property Rights: Protection and Management. India, IN: Nithyananda, K V
Cengage Learning India Private Limited, 2019.
8. Principles of Intellectual Property N.S. Gopalakrishnan & T.G. Ajitha, , Eastern Book
Company, 2nd Edition, 2014.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://ccsuniversity.ac.in/bridge-library/pdf/Research-Methodology-CR-Kothari.pdf
 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ge08/preview
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/121106007/L01.html
 https://www.coursera.org/learn/research-methods
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/319207471_HANDBOOK_OF_RESEARCH_METHODOL
OGY
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/research-methodology-books.html
 https://dst.gov.in/sites/default/files/E-BOOK%20IPR.pdf
 https://www.icsi.edu/media/webmodules/IPRLP_NOV29.pdf
 https://sagepub.libguides.com/c.php?g=964634&p=6968892
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GSeeyJVD0JU
 https://www.icsi.edu/docs/webmodules/Publications/9.4%20Intellectual%20Property%20Rights.pdf

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Identify research problem and collect relevant literatures for data analysis.
 Write the research design by using Exploratory and Descriptive Research methods.
 Prepare the questionnaire on brand awareness, effectiveness of training in public sector
 organization, Investors attitude towards Mutual funds in any financial institutions.
 Conduct Market survey and to investigate consumer perception towards any FMCG.
 Demonstrate Report writing and Presentation methods.
 Study Intellectual Property challenges in the field of business.
01.02.2023

Course outcome (Course Skill Set)

At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Understand various research approaches, techniques and strategies in the 2

appropriate in business.
CO2 Apply a range of quantitative / qualitative research techniques to business 3
and day to day management problems.
CO3 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of data analysis, interpretation 2
and report writing.
CO4 Develop necessary critical thinking skills in order to evaluate different 3
research approaches in Business.
Discuss various forms of the intellectual property, its relevance and 6
CO5 business impact in the changing global business environment and leading
International Instruments concerning IPR.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 2 2 3

CO5 2 3 2 3

CO5 1 3 2 2
01.02.2023

OPERATIONS RESEARCH
Course Code 22MBA24 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To Understand the mathematical tools that are needed to solve optimization problems
 To Elucidate optimisation techniques for various problems
 To understand and practice allocation problems, Assignment problems, Transportation problems
and Network Analysis (PERT & CPM).
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction: Evolution of OR, Definitions of OR, Scope of OR, Applications of OR, Phases in OR,
Characteristics and limitations of OR, models used in OR, Quantitative approach to decision making
models (Theory Only)
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Linear programming: Linear Programming Problem (LPP), Generalized LPP- Formulation of
LPP, Guidelines for formulation of linear programming model, Assumption, Advantages,
Limitations, Linear Programming problem (LPP), optimal and feasible Solutions by graphical
method (minimization and maximization).
(Theory and Problems)
Module-3 (8 Hours)
Decision Theory: Introduction, Decision under uncertainty- Maxmin &Minmax, Decision under
Risk- Expected Value, Simple decision tree problems. (Only theory).
Job Sequencing- ‘n’ jobs on 2 machines, ‘n’ jobs on 3 machines, ‘n’ jobs on ‘m’ machines.
Sequencing of 2 jobs on ‘m’ machines. (Theory and Problems).
Module-4 (8 Hours)
Transportation Problems: Formulation of transportation problem, types, initial basic feasible
solution using North-West Corner Rule (NWCR), Least Cost Method (LCM) and Vogel’s
Approximation method (VAM). Optimality in Transportation problem by Modified Distribution
(MODI) method. Unbalanced T.P. Maximization T.P. Degeneracy in transportation problems,
application of transportation problem. (Theory and Problems)

Module-5 (9 Hours)
Theory of Games: Definition, Pure Strategy problems, Saddle point, Max-Min and Min-Max criteria,
Principle of Dominance, Solution of games with Saddle point. Mixed Strategy problems (Graphical
and algebraic methods).
Assignment Problem: Formulation, Solutions to assignment problems by Hungarian method, Special
cases in assignment problems, unbalanced, Maximization assignment problems. Travelling Salesman
Problem (TSP). Difference between assignment and T.S.P (Theory and Problems)
Module-6 (9 Hours)
Project Management: Introduction, Construction of networks, Structure of projects, phases of
project management-planning, scheduling, controlling phase, work breakdown structure, project
control charts, network planning (Theory only)
Critical path method to find the expected completion time of a project, determination of floats in
networks, PERT networks, determining the probability of completing a project, predicting the
completion time of project; Cost analysis in networks. (Theory and Problems)
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problem in SEE.

Suggested Learning Resources: Books

1. Operation research .H.A. Taha, Person Publication 2012
2. Operation research , J.K.Sharma, McMillan Publication 2014
3. Quantitative Techniques in management, N D Vohra McGraw Hill 2015.
4. Quantitative Techniques: Theory and Problems, P.C. Tulsian and Vishal Pandey, Pearson
India 2006

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://youtu.be/vuKK3HAOB74
 https://lipas.uwasa.fi/-tsottine/lecture_notes/or.pdf
 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ma23/preview
 https://www.amirajcollege.in/wp-content/uploads/2020/10/3151910-operations-research-
theory-and-application-by-j.-k.-sharma-zlib.org_.pdf
 https://youtu.be/vUMGvpsb8dc
 https://youtu.be/fSuqTgnCVRg
 https://www.youtube.com/results?search_query=operation+research+transportation+problem
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fSuqTgnCVRg

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 To comprehend the operation research models
 Analyze various organisational problems using LPP, Assignments and Game theory
principles.
 Applying techniques of OR for project management
 Evaluate the constraints and challenges faced by the manufacturing and service organisations
using methods of operation research

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Get an insight into the fundamentals of Operations Research and its L1
definition, characteristics and phases
CO2 Use appropriate quantitative techniques to get feasible and optimal L3
solutions
CO3 Understand the usage of game theory , Queuing Theory and Simulation L2
for Solving Business Problems
CO4 Understand and apply the network diagram for project completion L4

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Course Code 22MBA25 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
1. To provide insights into the core concepts of strategic management.
2. To evaluate various business strategies in dynamic market environments.
3. To gain insights into various strategic management models.

Module-1 (7 Hours)
OVERVIEW OF STRATECIC MANAGEMENT
Meaning of strategy and strategic management, Stages of strategic management, the strategic
management model, benefits of strategic management, key terms in strategic management,
Competitive advantage, strategists, vision, mission, long term objectives, strategies, annual objectives
and policies.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
EXTERNAL ASSESSMENT
The process of performing an external audit, Nature of an external audit, key external forces, industry
analysis, competitive forces, competitive analysis-porter’s five forces model, key success factors.

Module-3 (9 Hours)
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
Nature of internal audit, key internal forces, the process of performing internal audit, Resource Based
View(RBV), Integrating strategy and culture, SWOT analysis, Value chain analysis, Bench marking,
Internal factor evaluation matrix.
Module-4 (9 Hours)
STRATEGY FORMULATION
The business vision and mission, process of developing vision and mission, importance of vision and
mission statement, characteristics of mission statement, long term objectives, types of strategies,
levels of strategies, integration strategies, intensive strategies, diversification strategies, defensive
strategies, Porters generic strategies, Blue Ocean Strategy.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
STRATEGY IMPLIMENTATION
Nature of strategy implementation, annual objectives, policies, resource allocation, managing
conflicts, restructuring, reengineering and e-engineering, linking performance and pay to strategies,
creating a strategy-supportive culture, operations concerns in implementing strategies.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
STRATEGY EVALUATION
The process of evaluating strategies, strategy evaluation framework, balanced score card,
characteristics of an effective evaluation system, contingency planning, 21st century challenges in
strategic management.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing mark for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements and earned the credits allotted to each subject/ course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work etc.,
(for 25 Marks) conducted in this course. Course instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of
the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary supporting documents for
this.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics under a Module.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven and question number eight is compulsory.
 100 Percent theory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Strategic Management Fred R. David Prentice Hall India Publication.
2. Crafting and Executing Strategy: The Quest for Competitive Advantage – Concepts and Cases
Arthur A. Thompson Jr. Margaret A. Peteraf John E. Gamble, A. J. Strickland III, Arun K.
Jain, McGraw Hill Education, 16/e 2016
3. 3. Contemporary Strategy Analysis, Robert M. Grant, Wiley India, 10e

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uY_ywciZUnM
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qGU-etCqbtQ
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TzcuoTOkPKg
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mgY864U-OH0
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MIOLtFPYfsE
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d2GoZDOXzzw
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZmRK9wc3hjI
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tyUw0h5i9yI
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FQLIrmmsHeo
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EvvnoNAUPS0
 https://study.com/academy/topic/strategic-management-overview.html
 https://www.cascade.app/blog/strategic-management-process

Note: The aforesaid links and study material are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
Skill Development Activities Suggested
 Analyzing the Mission and Vision statements of selected Indian companies.
 Applying Michael Porter’s model to an industry (Retail, Telecom, Infrastructure, FMCG,
Insurance, Banking etc.

 Internal Analysis & Strategies of a listed company in the form of the report to be
submitted.
 Pick a company that has performed very badly compared to its competitors. Collect
information on why the company failed. What were the issues in strategy and execution that
were responsible for the company’s failure in the market; analyze the internal and external
factors.
 Conduct SWOT analysis of companies around your campus.
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
Students should get clear idea about the concept of Strategic Management, L1
CO1
its relevance, Characteristics, process nature and purpose.
Student to acquire an understanding of how firms successfully L3
CO2 institutionalize a strategy and create an organizational structure for
domestic and overseas operations and gain competitive advantage.
To give the students an insight on strategy at different levels of an L2
CO3
organization to gain competitive advantage.
To help students understand the strategic drive in multinational firms and L4
CO4 their decisions in different markets.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Course Code 22MBA26 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 4 Exam Hours 3
Course Learning objectives:
 To introduce the fundamentals, tools and theories of managerial economics.
 To provide an understanding of the application of Economics in Business
 To learn the basic Micro and Macro-economic concepts.
 To understand Demand, Production, Cost, Profit and Market competitions with reference to firm
and industry.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction: Managerial Economics: Meaning, Nature, Scope & Significance, Uses of Managerial
Economics, Role and Responsibilities of Managerial Economist.
Theory of the Firm: Firm and Industry, Objectives of the firm, alternate objectives of firm.
Managerial theories: Baumol’s Model, Marris’s model of growth maximization, Williamson’s model
of managerial discretion.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Demand Analysis
Law of Demand, Exceptions to the Law of Demand, Elasticity of Demand , Classification of Price,
Income &Cross elasticity, Promotional elasticity of demand. Uses of elasticity of demand for
Managerial decision making, Measurement of elasticity of demand. Law of supply, Elasticity of
supply.
Demand forecasting: Meaning & Significance, Methods of demand forecasting. (Problems on
Price elasticity of demand, and demand forecasting using Time-series method).
Module-3 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Cost Analysis & Production Analysis

Concepts of Production, production function with one variable input - Law of Variable Proportion,
Laws of returns to scale, Indifference Curves, ISO-Quants & ISO-Cost line, Economies of scale,
Diseconomies of scale. Types of cost, Cost curves, Cost – Output Relationship in the short run and
in the long run, Long- Run Average Cost ( LAC) curve
Break Even Analysis–Meaning, Assumptions, Determination of BEA, Limitations, Margin of
safety, Uses of BEA In Managerial decisions (Theory and simple Problems).
Module -4 (9 Hours)
Market structure and Pricing Practices
Perfect Competition: Features, Determination of price under perfect competition, Monopolistic
Competition: Features, Pricing Under monopolistic competition, Product differentiation.
Oligopoly: Features, Kinked demand Curve, Cartels, Price leadership.
Monopoly: Features, Pricing under monopoly, Price Discrimination.
Descriptive Pricing Approaches: Loss leader pricing, Peak Load pricing, Transfer pricing.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
Indian Business Environment
Nature, Scope, Structure of Indian Business Environment, Internal and External Environment.
Political and Legal Environment, Economic Environment, Socio– Cultural Environment, Global
Environment. Private Sector, Growth, Problems and Prospects, SMEs, Significance in Indian
economy, challenges and prospects. Fiscal policy and Monetary Policy: Meaning of Fiscal policy,
three main types of fiscal policy – neutral policy, expansionary, and contractionary. Monetary
policy: Meaning, Objectives of monetary policies: Controlling inflation, Managing employment
levels, and Maintaining long-term interest rates. (Theory only)
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Indian Industrial Policy : New industrial policy 1991, Production Linked Incentive (PLI)
scheme for Promoting manufacturing of Telecom & Networking Products in India, New economic
initiatives proposed by Indian government for economic growth Private Sector-Growth- like Atma
Nirbhar Bharath Abhiyan.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 The SEE question paper should have the weightage of 80% theory and 20% problems

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Managerial Economics by Geethika,Ghosh & Choudhury, McGrawHill 2/e,2011
2. Managerial Economics by Dominick Salvotore, Oxford Publishers, 2e, 2016
3. Managerial Economics by D.M Mithani, HPH publications, 2016
4. Managerial Economics by Samuelson & Marks, Wiley, 5/e,2015
5. Managerial Economics by Maheshwari K. L., Varshney R.L., Sultan Chand & Sons.
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
 https://www.edx.org/learn/managerial-economics
 https://www.indiabudget.gov.in/
 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/imb19_mg16/preview
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZXDKdJO3V6Y

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Assessment of Demand Elasticity–Price, Income and Cross
 Demand Forecasting: Application of qualitative and quantitative methods of demand forecasting
to various sectors (Automobile, Service, Pharmaceutical, Information Technology, FMCG,
Hospitality etc.) in India. Students are expected to assess the impact of advertisement or sales
promotion on the demand of a product
 An in-depth study of economic indicators on the growth rate and presentation on the same
 Analyze the impact of the Union Budget on different sectors of the Indian economy, fiscal
discipline and disinvestment proposals of the GOI and presentation on the same
 A study on the effect of monetary policy on banking and NBFCs. A debate can be held on the
pros and cons of the monetary policy.
 Use of MS Excel in the above mentioned activities should be encouraged.

Course outcomes
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 The student will understand the application of Economic Principles in L2
Management decision making.

CO2 The student will earn the microeconomic concepts and apply them for L3
effective functioning of a Firm and Industry.

CO3 The Student will be able to understand, assess and forecast the demand. L5

CO4 The student will apply the concepts of production and cost for L3
optimization of production
CO5 The student will design competitive strategies like pricing, product L6
differentiation etc. and marketing according to the market structure.
CO6 The student will be able to understand the impact of macroeconomic L2
concepts.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 3 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 3
CO3 2 1 1
CO4 2 3 1 1
CO5 2 1 3 3
CO6 3 1 2
01.02.2023

3rd Semester MBA syllabus for Affiliated Colleges - Core Papers

LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBA31 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To understand the basic concepts of logistics and supply chain management
 To provide insights for establishing efficient, effective and sustainable supply chains.
 To comprehend the role of Information Technology in warehousing, transportation and Inventory
management in SCM
 To gain knowledge about international logistics and environment
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to Logistics Management: Meaning of Logistics, Definition of Logistics, Objectives
of Logistics, Types of Logistics, Need for Logistics Management, Evolution of logistics toward
Supply chain Management, Logistics Industry in India. Logistical Activities, Logistics Costs,
Expected cost of stock outs. Logistical Informational Requirements.

Module-2 (9 Hours)
Introduction to Supply chain Concepts, significance and key challenges. Scope of SCM-historical
perspective, essential features, Drivers of SCM, decision phases–process view, supply chain frame
work, key issues in SCM and benefits. Managing uncertainty in Supply Chain, (Bullwhip Effect),
Impact of uncertainties, forecasting in Supply Chain, Innovations in Supply Chain. Sourcing
Decisions in Global SCM, Key issues in Global sourcing, Outsourcing. Network design in the
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Strategic Logistic plan, Operating objectives of logistics planning, Flow of logistics planning,
Developing Logistic strategy, Logistics System Design and Administration, logistic environment
assessment, Pricing in logistics, Warehousing– scope, primary functions. Efficient Warehouse
Management System, Types of Warehouses.

Module-4 (9 Hours)
Introduction to Inventory Concepts: various costs associated with inventory, EOQ, buffer stock,
lead time reduction, reorder point / re-order level fixation, ABC analysis, SDE/VED Analysis.
Goals, need, impact of inventory management on business performance. Types of Inventory,
Alternative approach for classification of inventories, components of inventory decisions, inventory
cost management, business response to stock out, replenishment of inventory, material requirements
planning.

Module-5 (9 Hours)
Introduction to Distribution Management: Designing the distribution network, role of distribution,
factors influencing distribution, design options, distribution networks in practice. HUB & SPOKE
V/S Distributed Warehouses. Mode of transportation and criteria of decision. Transportation
Infrastructure .Factors impacting road transport cost, Packaging Issues in Transportation, role of
containerization, Hazards in transportation, State of Ocean Transport, global alliances.
01.02.2023

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Introduction IT in SCM: Role of computer/ IT in supply chain management, Benchmarking
concept, features and implementation. Vendor Managed Inventory, CPFRP, and Customer Service
Logistics and Environment, Methods and tools facilitating International Logistics, challenges,
Integrated Supply Chain and Logistics.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
Suggested Learning Resources:
Books:
1. A Logistic approach to Supply Chain Management, Coyle, Bardi, Longley, Cengage Learning,
Latest edition.
2. Supply Chain Management- Strategy, Planning and Operation, Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindl,
D.V.Kalr, Pearson Latest edition.
3. Supply chain Logistics Management, Donald J Bowersox, Mc Graw Hill, 4th Edition.
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awrx.GMrk_Niq2gI7Te7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzM
EdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660158891/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.researchgat
e.net%2fpublication%2f270876147_Supply_Chain_Management_4th_edition/RK=2/RS=l5xJm6f
L0veF5TOaSQK.2R1Giqo-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awrx.GMrk_Niq2gI7je7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzQ
EdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660158891/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.oracle.com
%2fwebfolder%2fs%2fassets%2febook%2fscm-complete-guide%2fpdf%2fscm-
guide.pdf/RK=2/RS=ztnJiPlSXhKgq3LJKrxxE5MspDo-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awrx.GMrk_Niq2gI7ze7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzU
EdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660158891/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttp%2ftrainingtancang.co
m%2fupload%2fnews%2febook-principles-of-supply-chain-management-
9010.pdf/RK=2/RS=Drwv0C_5itZTS4CPslKgOZLYxQM-
 www.proquest.com
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Students are expected to choose any four Indian Organizations and study their supply chain in
terms of drivers of the Supply chain and submit a report.
 Students should visit different logistics companies and understand the services provided by
them and submit a report.
 Students should identify any product/service and study the type of distribution system used
and understand the reason for using that particular type and present it in the class.
 Students should identify the various types of IT applications employed by Indian
Organizations in their Supply chain.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Demonstrate knowledge of the functions of logistics and supply chain L1/L2
management.
CO2 Relate concepts and activities of the supply chain to actual organizations L3
CO3 Analyse the role of technology in logistics and supply chain management. L4
CO4 Evaluate cases for effective supply chain management and its L4
implementation.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

Information Technology for Managers

Course Code 22MBA302 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week 4:0:0
SEE Marks 50
(L:P:SDA)
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Objectives:
 To make students understand the concept of information technology importance in today’s
corporate world.
 To create awareness about various Applications and emerging technologies available and its
usages for excel the service in corporate sector.
 To create awareness about role of MIS and its contributions to Corporate
 To make students understand Role of Computers/Social science software contributions.
Module-1 (9 Hours)
Introduction to MIS: Concepts, Roles, Impacts, MIS & its users, Components of an IS, Management
as Control systems, MIS support to Organization Effectiveness, MIS for E- business Digital Firms –
E-Commerce, E – Communication, E-Collaborations, Real Time Enterprise, MIS: Strategic Business
Planning, concept of Corporate planning, Essentiality of strategic Planning, Balance Score card, Score
Card & Dash Board, Security Challenges in E- Enterprises, Impacts of Information Technology on
society.
Module-2 (7 Hours)
Kinds of Information Systems: Transaction Processing System (TPS) - Office Automation System
(OAS) - Management Information System (MIS) - Decision Support System (DSS) and Group
Decision Support System (GDSS) - Expert System (ES) - Executive Support System (EIS or ESS),
Ethical Issues in Information systems.
Module-3 (9 Hours)
System Analysis and Development and its models: Need for System Analysis - Stages in System
Analysis - Structured SAD and tools like DFD, Context Diagram Decision Table and Structured
Diagram. System Development Models: Water Flow, Prototype, Spiral, RAD – Roles and
responsibilities of System Analyst, Database Administrator and Database Designer.
Module-4 (7 Hours)
Application of MIS in Manufacturing and Service Sector: Introduction- Personnel Management,
Financial Management, Production Management, Raw Materials Management, Marketing
Management. Introduction to Service Sector, Creating a distinctive service, MIS Applications in
Airlines, Hotel, Hospital, Banking, Insurance.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Information Technology Infrastructure: Introduction, data processing, transaction processing,

application Processing ,information system processing, TQM of IS, introduction network, network
topology, data communication, Data & Clint Service Architecture RDBMS, Data Ware House,
Introduction to E-business, models of E-business, internet and World Wide Web (WWW), Intranet
and extranet, Security in E-business, electronic payment system, Impact of web on strategic
management, web enabled business management, MIS in web environment.
Module-6 (9 Hours)
Emerging Exponential Technologies in Business Decision Making.
Introduction to Emerging Technologies and its types. Introduction to AI and its Applications in
Agriculture, Health, Business, Education. Introduction to IOT and its Applications at Smart home;
Smart grid; Smart city; Wearable devices; Smart farming. Introduction to AR, VR and MR,
Application of AR systems (education, medical, entertainment).

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. “Management Information Systems”, Kenneth J Laudon, Jane P. Laudon, Pearson/PHI, 11/e,
2010.
2. “Management Information Systems”, W. S. Jawadekar, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 5/e, 2017.
3. Management Information Systems, S. Sadagopan, PHI, 1/e, 2005.
4. Introduction to Information System, James A. O’ Brien, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition,
2007.
5. Management Information Systems, Iffy Oz, Thomson Course Technology, 3/e, 2003.
6. Management Information System, CSV Murthy, HPH, 3/e.
7. Corporate Information Strategy and Management, Lynda M Apple Gate, Robert D Austin et
al, Tata McGraw Hill, 7th Edition.
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec21_ge05/preview
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/122105022/L01.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5JMkdGQCm4k
 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105148/
 https://drive.google.com/file/d/16WQO04CNTgv0D236HTnEmrmF1DLx1MGW/view
 https://freevideolectures.com/course/2687/management-information-system
 https://www.academia.edu/33858287/LECTURE_NOTES_on_Management_Information
_Systems
 https://ebooks.lpude.in/management/mba/term_4/DMGT505_MANAGEMENT_INFORM
ATION_SYSTEM.pdf
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/management-information-systems-e19716384.html

Note:Development
Skill The aforesaid Activities
links and Suggested
study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
 Identify any companies and write at least 2 pages of analysis report on how participations are
benefited by IT enabled E-business enterprises.
 Study the Application of AI in any one field and prepare a Report.
 Study the Application of IOT in any one field and prepare a Report.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand the importance of Information technology for business. 2
CO2 Develop insights into technology and investigate its impact on Business. 3
CO3 Understand Various Measures of Technology available in corporate world. 2
CO4 Understanding how creativity and innovative Technologies help to find a 2
solution to problems.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

3rd Semester MBA Marketing Electives

CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code 22MBAMM303 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To develop an understanding of consumer behaviour theories and apply this understanding in a
marketing decision making context.
 To identify the multitude of factors influencing consumers so that each of us will be able to apply
this knowledge to improve market strategy.
 To Create better marketing programs and strategies basing on the knowledge of consumer
behaviour.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to consumer behaviour: Meaning of Consumer Behaviour; Difference between
Consumer & Customer; Nature & characteristics of Indian Consumers; Consumerism: meaning;
Consumer Movement in India; Rights & Responsibilities of consumers in India; Benefits of
consumerism.

Module-2 (9 Hours)
Consumer Decision Making: Consumer Buying Decision Process, Levels of Consumer Decision
Making – Four views of consumer decision making. On-line Decision Making: Meaning &
Process/Stages. Situational Influences- Nature of Situational Influence, Situational Characteristics
and consumption behaviour. Models of Consumer Behaviour: Input-Process-Output Model, Nicosia
Model, Howard Sheth Model, Engel-Kollat-Blackwell Models of Consumer Behaviour, Class
Exercise: Conducting consumer experiments.

Module-3 (9 Hours)
Motivation: Basics of Motivation, Needs, Goals, Positive & Negative Motivation, and Rational Vs
Emotional motives, Motivation Process, Arousal of motives, Selection of goals. Motivation Theories
and Marketing Strategy - Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, McGuire’s Psychological Motives.

Personality: Basics of Personality, Theories of Personality and Marketing Strategy (Freudian Theory,
NeoFreudian Theory, Trait Theory), Applications of Personality concepts in Marketing, Personality
and understanding consumer diversity, Brand Personality, Self and Self-Image.

Perception: Basics of Perception & Marketing implications, Elements of Perception, Dynamics of

Perception, Influence of perception on consumer behavior, Consumer Imagery, Perceived price,
Perceived quality, price/quality relationship, Perceived Risk, Types of risk, How to consumers’
01.02.2023

handle risk.

Module-4(9 Hours)
Learning: Elements of Consumer Learning, Marketing Applications of Behavioural Learning
Theories, Classical Conditioning – Pavlovian Model, Instrumental Conditioning.

Attitude: Basics of attitude, the nature of attitude, Models of Attitude and Marketing Implication,
(Tricomponent Model of attitude, Multi attribute attitude models. Elaboration Likelihood Model).

Persuasive Communication: Communications strategy, Target Audience, Media Strategy, Message

strategies, Message structure and presentation.

Module-5 (9 Hours)
Social Class: Social Class Basics, What is Social Class? (Social class & Social status, the dynamics
of status consumption), Features of Social Class, Five Social-Class Categories in India.

Culture: Basics, Meaning, Characteristics, Factors affecting culture, Role of customs, values and
beliefs in Consumer Behaviour. Subculture: Meaning, Subculture division and consumption pattern in
India, Types of subcultures. Cross Culture - Cross-cultural consumer analysis - Cross-cultural
marketing strategy: Cross-cultural marketing problems in India, Strategies to overcome cross-cultural
problem

Groups: Meaning and Nature of Groups, Types Family: The changing structure of family, Family
decision making and roles in decision making, Dynamics of husband-wife decision making, The
family life cycle & marketing strategy, Traditional family life cycle & marketing implications,

Reference Groups: Understanding the power & benefits of reference groups, Types of reference
group, Reference Group Appeals.

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Opinion Leadership: Dynamics of opinion leadership process, Measurement of opinion leadership,
Market Mavens, Opinion Leadership & Marketing Strategy, Creation of Opinion Leaders.

Diffusion of Innovations: Diffusion Process, Adoption Process: Stages, categories of adopters, Post
Purchase Processes.

Customer Relationship Management- Meaning & Significance of CRM, Types of CRM Strategies
for building relationship marketing,
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Consumer Behaviour, Schiffman Kanuk and S. Ramesh Kumar- Pearson, Latest Edition
2. Consumer Behaviour: A Managerial Perspective, Dr.Dheeraj Sharma, Jagdish N Sheth,
Banwari Mittal, Cengage Learning, latest Edition
3. Consumer Behaviour, Sethna, Sage Publications, 4/e, 2018
4. Consumer Behaviour in Indian Perspective, Himalaya Publications-latest Edition.
5. Consumer Behavior, Blackwell and Engel, Cengage Publication, Indian Edition.
6. Indian Consumers S.C.Mehta – Tata McGraw Hil
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

1. https://youtu.be/ctMpHpJouoU
2. https://youtu.be/jSrC-EWYIJQ
3. https://youtu.be/dptzjrKRAm8
4. https://youtu.be/60eRK7AwgwM
5. https://youtu.be/KILsxmXUm_M
6. https://youtu.be/0srjdRDh99Y
7. https://youtu.be/AGYxSskyuq0
8. https://books.mec.biz/tmp/books/NXHQRTHBQ2L87NIU6YVN.pdf
9. https://www.oup.com.au/__data/assets/file/0025/131983/9780195597080_SC.pdf
10. https://www.pdfdrive.com/consumer-behaviour-books.html

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Students can identify how marketers are addressing the various components and stages of the
decision making process.
 Students can go to malls and unorganized retail outlets and observe the behaviour of
consumers of different demographic segments while buying different category of goods. The
students need to present the findings / observations followed with a group discussion.
 Give examples of the products and services that cater to our: biogenic needs, acquired needs
and hedonic needs.
 Find three advertisements that appeal to the need for power, affiliation and achievement.
Discuss their effectiveness. Rewrite these for persons in different levels of Maslow’s
Hierarchy.
 Meet your friends and conduct a survey to find what are the important factors in their
purchase of mobiles, shoes, bags etc.
 Which type of personality, as per Jung's personality types, do you have? Similarly, find out
the personality types of your family members.
 Conduct a study on advertisements regarding a specific product and find out how consumer
deal with the information overload.
01.02.2023

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 The students will be able understand the background and concepts of L1
consumer behaviour.
CO2 The students will be able to identify the dynamics of consumer behaviour L3
and the basic factors that influence the consumers decision process
CO3 The students will be able to demonstrate how concepts may be applied to L2
marketing strategy.
CO4 Students will be able to apply and demonstrate theories to real world L4
marketing situations by profiling and identifying marketing segments.

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 2 2
CO2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 3
01.02.2023

Sales and Retail Management

Course Code 22MBAMM304 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Learning objectives:

 To provide an understanding of the concepts, techniques and approaches in Sales
Management.
 To emphasize on the Sales Manager’s problems and dilemmas.
 To develop skills for generating, evaluating and selecting sales strategies.
 To develop an understanding of the contemporary retail management, issues, strategies and
trends.
 To highlight the importance of retailing and its role in the success of modern business.
 To acclimatize with the insights of retailing, key activities and relationships.
Module-1 ( 7 Hours)
Introduction to sales management: Meaning, Evaluation, Importance, Emerging Trends in Sales
Management, elementary study of sales organizations, qualities and responsibilities of sales manager. Selling
skills & selling strategies: Selling and business Styles, selling skills, situations, Personal Selling: Meaning and
definition, selling process, sales presentation, Handling customer objections, Follow-u action.
Module-2 ( 9 Hours)
Management of Sales Territory & Sales Quota: Sales territory, meaning, size, designing, sales quota,
procedure for sales quota. Types of sales quota, Methods of setting sales Quota.
Recruitment and selection of sales force, Training of sales force.
Module-3 ( 9 Hours)
Sales force Motivation and Compensation: Nature of motivation, Importance, Process and factors in the
motivation, Compensation-Meaning, Types of compensation plans and evaluation of sales force by
performance and appraisal process. Sales management job: Standard sales management process-International
sales management -International market selection, market survey approach or strategy.
Module-4 ( 9 Hours)
Retail Management: Introduction and Perspectives on Retailing, World of Retailing, Retail management,
introduction, meaning, characteristics, emergence of organizations of retailing - Types of Retailers (Retail
Formats) - Multichannel Retailing - role of retailing, trends in retailing, FDI in Retail - Problems of Indian
Retailing- Ethics in retailing- Current Scenario.
Module-5 ( 9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Setting up Retail organization: Size and space allocation, location strategy, factors Affecting the
location of Retail, Retail location Research and Techniques, Objectives of Good store Design. Retail
Market Strategy - Financial Strategy Human Resource Management, Information Systems and supply
chain management & Logistics. Store Layout and Space planning: Types of Layouts, role of Visual
Merchandiser, Visual Merchandising Techniques, Controlling Costs and Reducing Inventories Loss,
Exteriors, Interiors. Store Management: Responsibilities of Store Manager, Store Security, Parking
Space. Problem at Retail Centers, Store Record and Accounting System, Coding System, Material
Handling in Stores, Management of modern retails stores.
Module-6 ( 7 Hours)
Relationship Marketing & International Retailing: Management & Evaluation of Relationships in
Retailing, Retail Research in Retailing: Importance of Research in Retailing, Trends in Retail Research, Areas
of Retail Research. Customer Audits, Brand Management in retailing, Internationalization of Retailing and
Evolution of International Retailing, Motives of International Retailing, International Retail Environment and
issues in international retailing
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Sales & Distribution Management: Tapan K. Panda & Sunil Sahadev, 6/e, Oxford University
Press, 2012.
2. Sales Management by Charles, Futrell, 6/e, Thomson South Western, 2003.
3. Retail Management - Levy & Weitz, TMH, latest edition.
4. Retail Management - Chetan Bajaj, Oxford University press.
5. Retail Management-A Global Perspective: Text and Cases, Dr.Harjit Singh, S.Chand, 2018.
6. Sales & Retail Management, an Indian perspective by Dr.S.L Gupta, 1/e, Excel Books, 2007.
7. Salesmanship and Sales Management-P.K Sahu & K C Raut, 3/e, Vikas Publishing House.
8. Integrated Retail Management - James R. Ogden & Denise Trodden, Biztantra, Latest Edition.
9. Retail Marketing Management - Dravid Gilbert, 2/e, Pearson Education
10. Retail Management: A Strategic Approach - Barry Berman, Joel R. Evans, Pearson. Latest
Edition.
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/sales-management-e529300.html
 https://ncert.nic.in/textbook/pdf/ieva101.pdf
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/retail-marketing-e34523955.html
 https://www.coursera.org/lecture/mafash/retail-management-yrF51
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8ah0ET7zlBw
 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec20_mg01/preview
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110105122/L16.html
 https://freevideolectures.com/course/4216/nptel-sales-distribution-management
 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110105122
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110105122/L01.html
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Interview a salesperson in a retail store and write a brief report about what they like and
dislike about their jobs, their salary, travelling allowances, sales quotas, why they chose a
sales career, and what does it take to succeed in this profession.
 Go to a kirana store and a supermarket and compare the following:
a) Store arrangement
b) No of brands carried
c) Pricing policies – are discounts given?
d) Service – personal or impersonal? Etc.
 Go to at least three kirana stores in your neighbourhood and discuss with them the importance
of location, pricing, credit policy, etc. What percentages of goods are sold ‘loose’ in each
locality and compare this with the approximate income range of the customers? What are the
retailer’s losses when a customer defaults in payment? Does he make up for it by increasing
his prices to other customers?
 Ask your friends if they would buy certain goods like groceries, vegetables, socks, mobile,
pens etc from the roadside vendor as against a regular shop. Group the products into low risk
and high risk ones. Does this buying behavior also depend on the personality of the individual
doing the buying? Or the one doing the selling?
 Student can make a presentation on any product or the services of student choice, covering
selling strategies and one day work exposure towards merchandising in any big retail outlets
of respective places where institute is operating. Rural colleges can send the students to the
city nearby to observe the merchandising planning in retail outlets and to make a small report.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. No. Description Blooms Level
CO1 Understand the selling techniques in an organisation. L2
CO2 Develop a plan for organizing, staffing & training sales force. L3
CO3 Organize sales territories to maximize selling effectiveness. L3
CO4 Evaluate sales management strategies. L5
CO5 Find out the contemporary retail management issues and strategies. L1
CO6 Evaluate the recent trends in retailing and its impact in the success of L5
modern business.
CO7 Understand Relate store management and visual merchandising practices L2
for effective retailing.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
CO5 1 2 3 2
CO6 1 2 1
CO7 1 2 3
01.02.2023

SERVICES MARKETING
Course Code 22MBAMM305 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To acquaint the students with the characteristics of services and their marketing implications.
 To discuss and conceptualize the service quality, productivity in services, role of personnel in service
marketing and to manage changes in the environment.
 To familiarize the students with the GAPS model and strategizing towards closing the GAPS for effective
services marketing.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction: Meaning and Definition of services Marketing, Reasons for the growth of services
sector and its contribution; difference in goods and service marketing; characteristics of services;
concept of service marketing triangle; service marketing mix;
Consumer behavior in services: Search, Experience and Credence property, consumer expectation
of services, two levels of expectation, Zone of tolerance, Factors influencing customer expectation of
services. Customer perception of services, Factors influencing customer perception of service, Service
encounters, Customer satisfaction, Strategies for influencing customer perception.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
GAP models of service quality: Key reasons for gap using marketing research to understand
customer expectation, Types of service research, building customer relationship through retention
strategies–Relationship marketing, Evaluation Of customer relationships, Benefits of customer
relationship, levels of retention strategies, Market segmentation-Basis & targeting in services.
“Hard”&“Soft” standards.
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Yield management: balancing capacity utilization, pricing. Waiting line strategies-four basic
Waiting line strategies.
Matching supply & demand in capacity, four common types of constraints facing services, optimum
v/s maximum use of capacity, strategies for matching capacity & demand. Key reasons for GAP-2
service leadership- Creation of service vision and implementation, Service quality as profit strategy.

Module-4 (9 Hours)
Boundary spanning roles: Emotional labour, Source of conflict, Quality- productivity trade off,
Strategies for closing GAP3. Customer’s role in service delivery-Importance of customer &
customer’s role in service delivery, Strategies for enhancing-Customer participation,-Key reasons for
GAP 4 involving communication, four categories of strategies to match service promises with
delivery.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Pricing of services: Role of price and value in provider GAP 4, Role of non-monitory cost, Price as
an indicator of service quality–Approaches to pricing services, pricing strategies, Key intermediaries
for service delivery, Intermediary control strategies. Role of services marketing communication
SERVQUAL Model.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Physical evidence in services: Importance of Physical Evidence, Elements of Physical Evidence,
Physical Evidence Strategies, Guidelines for Physical Evidence.
Service scapes: Types of service scapes-Objectives and Goals of service scapes, Role of service
scapes, Approaches for understanding service scapes effects, Frame work for understanding service
scapes & its effect on behavior-Guidance for physical evidence strategies.
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books:
4. Services Marketing, Valarie A Zeithmal& Mary Jo, McGraw Hill, 6/e 2018
5. Services Marketing, Christopher Lovelock, Pearson Education, 2014
6. Services Marketing, Parasuraman, Sage Publications 2018

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awr1SU.Oo_Nidm4IV9i7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzEEdnRpZAMEc
2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660163087/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2febooks.lpude.in%2fmanagement%2fmba%2fter
m_4%2fDMGT510_SERVICES_MARKETING.pdf/RK=2/RS=rz8XYyCSOhGnU6JznbgeyVS_8NM-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awr1SU.Oo_Nidm4IWNi7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzIEdnRpZAME
c2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660163087/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.coursehero.com%2ffile%2f27673829%2
fServices-Marketing-5th-Edition-pdf%2f/RK=2/RS=Ric3RoGnmc212j6Xe5dA6FmlStA-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awr1SU.Oo_Nidm4IY9i7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzQEdnRpZAME
c2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660163087/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2finfolearners.com%2febooks%2fessentials-of-
services-marketing-3rd-edition-pdf-free-download%2f/RK=2/RS=eUc.stCHtWkAmoi3H7VQ_mdeFT0-
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Ask students to choose a service industry of their choice at the beginning of the semester
 Ask them to do an in-depth study of the industry and give a presentation at the end of the
every Module relating the concepts to the particular industry (GAPS).
 Students can prepare service blueprints for any service of their choice.
 Identify any existing services, locate loopholes in the design and suggest modifications.
 Visit a service industry and analyse the role of customers in service delivery.

Course outcome (Course Skill Set)

At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Develop an understanding about the various concepts and importance of L1/L2
Services Marketing.
CO2 Enhance knowledge about emerging issues and trends in the service sector. L3
CO3 Learn to implement service strategies to meet new challenges. L4
CO4 Analysing Services blue print and SERVQUAL model L4
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

RURAL MARKETING
Course Code 22MBAMM306 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 Make students have an understanding of the fundamental concepts of rural marketing & the
environment in which rural marketing system operates
 To gain the knowledge on consumer buying behavior and influencing factors on consumer
buying behavior at rural market and the decision process
 To understand the promotional mix in rural markets
 To understand premise underlying in rural markets
 To comprehend the initiatives and future of rural markets

Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction to Rural Markets: Definition, Concept, Nature, Size and Scope of Indian Rural
markets, Rural Demand, Buying Characteristics, Rural Market Structure: Demographic, Physical,
Economic Environment. Rural Infrastructural Facilities – Warehousing, Cold Storage, Logistics.
Indian Rural Market: Profile, Rural Vs Urban Market, Importance of Branding, Problems of Rural
Consumers: Adulteration, Short Weight and Measures, Unfair Warranties and Guarantees,
Unreasonable Pricing, Challenges and Future of Rural Marketing.
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Understanding the Rural Consumer: Rural Community in India. Profile of Rural markets:
Segmenting the Rural Market, Target and Positioning, Rural Consumer Behavior, Rural Buyer
Characteristics, Consumer Buying Decision Process, Factors Affecting Consumer Behavior –Cultural,
Social, Technological, Economic and Political.

Module-3 (9 Hours)
Marketing Mix in Rural Markets: Product: Significance, Concept and Product Mix Decisions,
Pricing Strategy: Objectives, Policies and Strategies, Promotion: Advertising, Sales Promotions
Communication in Rural marketing, language and Culture Distribution Strategies, Channels of
Distribution, Role of Co-operative, Government, Financial Institutions, Public Sector Undertakings,
Regulated Markets and Public Distribution Systems.

Module-4 (9 Hours)
Innovation in Rural Markets: Significance of innovation in rural markets, The intervention of IT in
Rural Markets: Importance and Initiatives, The emergence of Organized retailing in Rural India, Key
Drivers of Organized Retail, Cases in organized retail: Operative Models adopted by Indian
Companies.

Module-5 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Initiatives of Rural Marketing: Improvement measures taken by the Government –Initiatives by

Co-operative and Private Sector, Present Scenario-Rural Female Empowerment, Micro Financing,
Mobility in Emerging Markets, Growing Rural Tourism. E- Commerce: Importance of E-Commerce
and Impact of E-Marketing on rural consumers, Concept of Digital Village, Role of Social Media in
rural marketing. Information Technology: Impact of IT in Agricultural Marketing, E Chaupal, Project
Shakti, Web-casting-online training and guidance to farmers.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Future of Rural Marketing: Changing Role of Rural Sector in India; Rural Income and Demand,
Problems in Marketing of agricultural inputs in Rural India – Chemical fertilizers, Certified seeds and
Agricultural Equipments, Tractors, Engines, Pump Sets, Marketing of Agricultural products. Online
Marketers: Role of Online Marketers, Growth and Challenges.
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Rama Bijapurkar (2007), We are Like That Only, the logic of Consumer India, Penguin Books
2. Prahalad C.K (2008), Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid, Pearson Publication
3. R V Badi, N V Badi, Rural Marketing, 2008, Himalaya Publishing House.
4. U C Mathur, Rural marketing, Text and Cases, 2008, excel books
5. CSG Krishnamacharyulu, Lalitha Ramakrishnan, Cases in Rural marketing, An Integrated
Approach, 2006, Pearson Publication.
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
 https://youtu.be/fB3Dl31FE4I
 https://youtu.be/Hguauxu_0bM
 https://youtu.be/d8-k2LbP-y4
 https://youtu.be/WttNQtX5cyA
 https://youtu.be/OpU33j9wVss
 https://youtu.be/jpqZb0ZhA2s
 https://youtu.be/5sDNYnhbq9A
 https://youtu.be/hih1rLTJbWM
 https://youtu.be/DzZCVqrtXYw
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Make students to visit a village.
 Demonstrating e-Choupal activities
 Visit a village and undertake a research about the buying pattern of rural consumers.
 Study about their disposable income.
 Each student to give presentation of 5 minutes with respect to rural consumer buying
behaviour.
01.02.2023

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Recognize appropriate Rural marketing objectives. L1
CO2 Knowledge on consumer buying behavior and influencing factors on L3
consumer buying behavior at rural market and the decision process
Appreciate the e-commerce and innovation in Rural marketing.
CO3 Illustrate the promotional mix in rural markets Rural marketing and L2
marketing strategies.
CO4 Knowledge of premise underlying in rural markets L5
CO5 To comprehend the initiatives and future of rural markets L5

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 2 3
CO2 1 2 2
CO3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO4 1 2 2
CO5 1 2 2
01.02.2023

3rd Semester MBA Finance Electives

Strategic Cost Management

Course Code 22MBAFM303 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Learning objectives:

 To understand various concepts and terminologies used in cost management.
 To explain and critically evaluate various costing methods and techniques such as marginal
costing, budgetary control, standard costing, activity based costing etc.
 To apply and analyse various costing methods and techniques mentioned above.

Module-1 (8 Hours)
Introduction to Cost Management- Cost Accounting to Cost Management- Elements of costs-
Classification of costs-Methods of costing-Cost Management Tools- A Strategic View to Cost
Management- Preparation of a cost sheet. (Problems on cost sheet).
Module-2 (8 Hours)
Overheads: Classification and Collection, Difference between Cost Allocation and Cost
Apportionment, (Full-fledged Problems on Primary and secondary distribution, Simultaneous
equations, Absorption of Overhead, Theory on Under and Over absorption of Overhead). Demerits
of Traditional Costing, Activity Based Costing, Cost Drivers, Cost Analysis Under ABC (Unit level,
Batch Level and Product Sustaining Activities), Benefits and weaknesses of ABC. (Theory &
Problems).
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Marginal Costing – Nature and Scope- Applications-Break even charts and Point, Decision-making
(all types with full problems) Differential Cost Analysis, Advantages and Disadvantages of Marginal
Costing Process Costing: introduction to Process Costing, Cost accumulation in process costing
(Problems).

Module-4 (9 Hours)
Budgetary Control- Objectives of Budgetary control, Functional Budgets, Master Budgets, Key
Factor Problems on Production Budgets and Flexible Budgets. Standard Costing:- Comparison with
Budgetary control, analysis of Variances, Simple Problems on Material and Labour variances
only (Problems).

Module-5 ( 9 Hours)
Cost Audit& Reporting to Management-objectives and advantages of Cost Audit, Cost Audit
report. Management Audit- Objectives and Scope. Reporting to Management – Purpose of reporting-
Requisites of a good report, Classifications of Report, Segment reporting, Cost Reduction and Cost
Control, Target Costing – its Principles, Balanced Scorecard: Features and Purpose (theory only).
01.02.2023

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Responsibility Centers: Revenue and Expense Centers Responsibility Centers, Revenue Centers.
Transfer Pricing – Meaning, Principles of Transfer Pricing, Methods of Transfer of Pricing expense
Centers, Administrative Centers. Cost Management for Specific Sectors – Gold, Agriculture, IT
sector, Phrama and others (theory only).

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problems in the SEE.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Cost Accounting (2e) by M.Y. Khan and P.K. Jain (2017). McGraw Hill Education.
2. Management Control Systems (4e) by Kenneth Merchant and Wim Van Der Stede. Pearson
Education (2019).
3. A Text book of Cost and Management Accounting: Arora M. N, 11th Edition, Vikas.
4. Managerial Accounting: James Jiambalvo, 4th Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
5. Cost Accounting: Jawaharlal & Seema Srivastava, 4th Edition, TMH

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://journal.ump.edu.my/ijim/article/view/5983/1166
 http://indianresearchjournals.com/pdf/APJMMR/2013/April/7.pdf
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fWPPfUiPdHA
 https://www.coursera.org/lecture/construction-cost-estimating/introduction-to-cost-estimating-
and-cost-control-xXOyj
 https://www.icsi.edu/WebModules/Publications/FULL_BOOK_PP-CMA-2017-JULY_4.pdf
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/cost-management-e20763553.html
 https://www.academia.edu/31736202/Cost_Management_Accounting_and_Control

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 The student can choose any product and get details about the actual cost of material, wages and other
cost and prepare a cost statement.
 Standard cost of each component has to be obtained and compared with actual cost to find the variance
and reasons for variance to assess efficiency of purchase, operations and production.
 Prepare a comparative chart to understand and depict the budgetary control mechanisms in Private and
Public Sector enterprises.
 Visit to a NGO and find out the various cost heads and how they do differ from profit making business
organizations.
 Conduct an in-house workshop on Transfer pricing for Manufacturing Sector (Analyze how value
addition takes place at every stage of the production).
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand the goals and strategies of business units. L2
CO2 Determine standard costing and variance analysis cost control in Business L5
decision making,
CO3 Applications of Management accounting and control systems in Corporate. L3
CO4 Critically evaluate all traditional and non-traditional costing methods such L5
as absorption costing; marginal costing and activity based costing.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO

1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBAFM304 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Learning objectives:

 To acquaint students with fundamental concepts of capital market and its instruments.
 To understand techniques to evaluate and analyze risk and return characteristics of securities
such as individual stocks, mutual funds etc.
 To provide basic knowledge of the theories and practices of modern portfolio choice and
investment decision
Module-1 (6 Hours)
Introduction to Investment: Investment Avenues, Attributes, Investor V/s speculator, Features of a
good Investment, Investment Process.
Financial Instruments: Money Market Instruments, Capital Market Instruments, Derivatives.
Securities Market: Trading & Settlement Procedure, Stock Market Indicators- Indices of Indian Stock
Exchanges (only Theory).
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Return and Risk Concepts: Concept of Risk, Causes of Risk, Types of Risk- Systematic risk-
Market Price Risk, Interest Rate Risk, Purchasing Power Risk, Unsystematic Risk- Business risk,
Financial Risk, Insolvency Risk, Risk-Return Relationship, Concept of diversifiable risk and non-
diversifiable risk. Calculation of Return and Risk of Individual Security & Portfolio (Theory &
Problems).

Module-3 (9 Hours)
Valuation of Securities: Bond – Meaning, features, types, determinants of interest rates, Bond
Valuation, Bond Duration, Bond Management Strategies. Preference Shares- Concept, Valuation.
Equity Shares- Concept, Valuation, Dividend Valuation Models, P/E Ratio valuation model. (Theory
& Problems).

Module-4 (8 Hours)
Fundamental & Technical Analysis: Macro-Economic and Industry Analysis: Fundamental
analysis-EIC Frame Work, Economy Analysis, Industry Analysis, Company Analysis- Financial
Statement Analysis. Market Efficiency: Efficient Market Hypothesis, Forms of Market Efficiency,
Empirical test for different forms of market efficiency. Technical Analysis – Concept, Theories- Dow
Theory, Eliot Wave theory. Charts-Types, Trends and Trend Reversal Patterns. Mathematical
Indicators –Moving Average Convergence-Divergence, Relative Strength Index (Theory only).

Module-5 (9 Hours)
Modern Portfolio Theory: Markowitz Model- Diversification, Portfolio Return, Portfolio Risk,
Efficient Frontier. Sharpe’s Single Index Model, Capital Asset Pricing Model: Assumptions, CAPM
Equation, Capital Market Line, Security Market Line, CML V/s SML. Sharpe’s Optimum Portfolio
Construction. (Theory & Problems).
01.02.2023

Module-6 (9 Hours)
Portfolio Management Strategies and Performance Evaluation: Portfolio Management Strategies:
Active and Passive Portfolio Management strategy. Portfolio Revision: Portfolio Revision Strategies
– Objectives, Performance plans. Mutual Funds: Concept of Mutual Funds, Participants in Mutual
Funds, Advantages of Investment in Mutual Fund, Measure of Mutual Fund Performance. Portfolio
performance Evaluation: Measures of portfolio performance (Theory & Problems).

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problems in the SEE.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Investment Analysis and Portfolio management, Prasanna Chandra, Tata McGraw Hill, 3/e,
2010.
2. Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, S Kevin, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
3. Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, Punithavathy Pandian, Vikas Publications, 2/e,
2018.
4. Security Analysis & Portfolio Management – Fisher and Jordan, 6/e Pearson, PHI.
5. Investments –Zvi Bodie, Kane, Marcus & Mohanty, TMH, 8th Edition, 2010.
6. Investment management (Security Analysis and & Portfolio Management), Bhalla V.K., Vikas
Publications, 19/e, 2018.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110105035/L01.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fv63XWOlERM
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NIjucusocFw
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110105035/L02.html
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/investment-management-e1833037.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5QuK8L1g2r4
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Each student will be given a virtual cash of Rs.10 Lakhs and they will be asked to invest in
equity shares based on fundamental analysis throughout the semester. At the end the best
investment will be awarded based on the final net worth. Virtual on line trading account can
be opened for the student and every week 2 hours can be allotted to invest, monitor and
evaluate.
 Students should study the stock market pages from business press and calculate the risk and
return of selected companies.
 Students can do a macro economy using GDP growth.
 Students’ are expected to do Industry analysis for specific sectors.
 Students can do Company analysis for select companies using profitability and liquidity ratios.
 Practice technical analysis using Japanese candle sticks.
01.02.2023

Course outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Understand the capital market and various Instruments for Investment. L2
CO2 Assess the risk and return associated with investments and methods to L5
value securities.
CO3 Analyze the Economy, Industry and Company framework for Investment. L4
CO4 Learn the theories of Portfolio management and also the tools and L5
techniques for efficient portfolio management.

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO

1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

ADVANCED FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBAFM305 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03

Course Learning objectives:

 To understand the concept capital structure and capital structure theories.
 To assess the dividend policy of the firm.
 To be aware of the management of working capital and it’s financing.
 To understand the techniques of managing different components of working capital.
 To evaluate the impact of financial decisions on the strategic direction of the organisation
 To Identify and evaluate the exposure of a company to financial risk and the techniques required
to manage this risk
 To Evaluate complex investment appraisal situations and appreciate the importance of the cost of
capital to the organisation and how the capital structure chosen will impact upon this
 To Analyse the key strategic financial issues that must be considered in an acquisition or merger,
including valuation of the target company
Module-1 (9 Hours)
Capital Structure Decisions: Capital structure & market value of a firm, Factors determining capital
structure, Credit agency ratings-debt ratio-debt to equity ratio-long term debt to capitalization ratio.
Theories of capital structure: Net Income approach, Net Operating Income approach, Modigliani
Miller approach, Traditional approach. (Theory only).
Module-2 (9 Hours)
Dividend Policy: Dividend policy, Theories of dividend policy: Theory of irrelevance, Bird- in –the-
hand theory & Tax preference theory, Walter’s & Gordon’s model, Modigliani & Miller approach.
Dividend policies, stable dividend, stable payout and growth. Bonus shares and stock split -corporate
dividend behaviour. (Theory and Problems).
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Working Capital Management Policy: Management of Working capital, Types of working capital,
Determination and estimation of working capital needs, Level of current assets, Sources for financing
working capital- Bank finance for working capital. (No problems on estimation of working capital).
Working capital financing: Short term financing of working capital- long term financing of working
capital. Working capital leverage concepts. (Theory)
Module-4 (7 Hours)
01.02.2023

Inventory Management: Purpose and functions of inventories -Types of inventory (Raw-materials,

work-in-progress (WIP), finished goods & Maintenance, Repairs and Operations (MRO).
Determination of inventory control levels: ordering, reordering, danger level. Techniques of inventory
management- Economic Order Quantity (EOQ model). Pricing of raw material - Monitoring and
control of inventories- ABC Analysis. (Theory and problems)
Module-5 (7 Hours)
Receivables Management & Factoring: Nature and objectives of Receivables Management – Credit
management through credit policy variables- marginal analysis- Credit evaluation of individual
accounts and its monitoring receivables - Numerical credit scoring- Control of accounts receivables-
Problems on credit granting decision. (Theory and Problems)
Factoring: Meaning, definition, types & its benefits (Theory only)
Module-6 (9 Hours)
Cash Management: Presentation: Facets of Cash Management, Motive for holding cash, Managing
cash collection and disbursement-investing surplus, cash in marketable securities, Forecasting cash
flows, Cash budgets-long-term cash forecasting, optimal cash balances, Baumol model-Miller-Orr
model-Strategies for managing surplus fund. (Theory and Problems)
Recent Developments in Advanced Financial Management-Crypto currency, Block chain
technology, Cloud funding, Digitization of financial transactions-Big data project finance,
Behavioural finance-Derivative markets in developing countries. (Theory only)
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 percent theory and 60 percent problem in SEE.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Financial Management: Text, Problems & CasesM.Y. Khan & P.K. Jain, Tata McGraw Hill,
7/e, 2017.
2. Financial Management: Theory and Practice, Prasanna Chandra Tata McGraw Hill, 10/e,
2019.
3. Advanced Financial Management, Binoy Mathew & G. Nagarajan, Jayvee Digital Publishing,
2/e, 2022.
4. Financial Management, Prasanna Chandra, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
5. Financial Management and Policy: Text and Cases, Bhalla. V. K. (2009). 9th Edition, Anmol
Publications Pvt. Ltd.
6. Corporate Finance, Vishwanath S R, Sage Publications, 3/e. 2019.
7. Financial Management & Policy, James C Vanhorne, Sanjay Dhamija,Pearson, 12/e.
8. Financial Management, Pandey, I.M., Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
9. Financial Management, SheebaKapil, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
10. Fundamentals of Financial Management, Chandrabose, PHI, New Delhi.
11. Financial Management, Kulakarni. P.V., Himalaya Publishing House Co. Ltd, Mumbai.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.pdfdrive.com/advance-financial-management-e33606254.html
 https://www.smartzworld.com/notes/advanced-financial-management-notes-pdf-afm/
 https://www.academia.edu/33769964/Advanced_Financial_Management_Class_Notes
 https://5y1.org/document/advanced-financial-management-pdf.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BKbXjfhLf0w
 https://opentuition.com/acca/afm/
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CCQwz_Gwo6o
 http://mappingyourfuture.org/money
 http://www.mymoney.gov/
 http://www.vertex42.com/Calculators/debt-reduction-calculator.html.
 http://www.nfcc.org/
 Beckett-Camarata, J. (2020), "References", Public-Private Partnerships, Capital
Infrastructure Project Investments and Infrastructure Finance, Emerald Publishing
Limited, Bingley, pp. 225-241. https://doi.org/10.1108/978-1-83909-654-920201018
 http://mappingyourfuture.org/money;
 http://www.mymoney.gov/
 http://www.vertex42.com/Calculators/debt-reduction-calculator.html;
 http://www.nfcc.org/
 www.ft.com - Financial Times
 www.wsj.com - The Wall Street Journal Online
 www.investmentinternational.com - Investment International
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Study the working capital financing provided by a Bank and submit the report on the same.
 Study the annual report of any two companies and prepare a cash budget for next year.
 Study dividend policy of companies and its impact on shareholders’ wealth.
 Study implications of bonus issues/stock splits of companies.
 To be able to utilise this growing demand, one needs good skills. One way to keep your
financial management skills sharp and current is to gain experience and continuously handle
new work but this will usually take a longer time to accomplish.
 Analysis of the performance of an organisation
 Understand the key ratios (profitability, liquidity, efficiency, gearing and investor) which are
used in the evaluation of a company’s performance & Interpret the results and make
recommendations for improvement
Module Learning Environment
The module will be taught in a traditional classroom setting for lectures and tutorials. At
commencement of the course learners are provided with a detailed course manual and a learner
handbook, incorporating the module descriptor, learning outcomes and assignment briefs.
Module Teaching and Learning Strategy
The module is delivered by means of formal and participative lectures supported by the use of case
studies, reflecting the importance of finance in practical situations. Tutorials are also used to discuss
financial management topics in greater depth and past examination papers with suggested solutions
are introduced. Learners are expected to undertake significant reading and preparation before classes.
Module Assessment Strategy
Class work and directed assignments are allocated on a regular basis. Learners are required to
complete the necessary assignments throughout the module. Learners are advised how to approach the
assignments both in terms of the research and the presentation involved. Assignments account for
20% of the module marks. The remaining 80% is reserved for a closed book examination on module
completion.
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. No. Description Blooms

Level
CO1 Demonstrate the applicability of the concept of Financial Management to L1
understand the managerial Decisions and Corporate Capital Structure
CO2 Apply the Leverage and EBIT EPS Analysis associate with Financial Data L3
in the corporate&
Analyse the complexities associated with management of cost of funds in
the capital Structure
CO3 Demonstrate how the concepts of financial management and investment, L2
financing and dividend policy decisions could integrate while identification
and resolution of problems
CO4 Be aware of the techniques of cash, inventory and receivables management L4
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

Banking & Services Operations

Course Code 20MBAFM306 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
● To understand the Structure and functions of Public sector Banks and Commercial Banking in
India.
● To learn the functions of various Financial Services in India.
● To understand role of Banking and Financial Services in Business organizations
● To know the functioning of NBFC ‘s in India
Module-1 (8 Hours)
1Banking System and Structure in India: Types of banks –Public Sector, Regional Banks, Credit
creation and Deployment of Funds. Role of Reserve Bank and GOI as regulator of banking system,
Banking sector reforms, Provisions of Banking Regulation Act & Reserve Bank of India Act,
Quantitative and Qualitative Measures of Credit Control, Recent trends in Banking- Banking
Technology, Neo banking, Payment banking, Fintech, Crypto currency, Bank Performance analysis
and Future of Banking. (Theory)

Module-2 (8 Hours)
Commercial Banking: Structure, Functions - Primary & Secondary functions, Services rendered.
Concept of Universal Banking, Analysis of Banks’ Financial statements, Financial statement of
Banks, Comparison of bank ratios of Public sector banks, Private sector and Foreign banks operating
in India. (Theory)

Module-3 (8 Hours)
Merchant Banking: Categories, Services offered, Issue management – Pre and Post issue
management, Issue pricing, Preparation of Prospectus, Underwriting, Private Placement, Book
Building Vs. Fixed price issues. (Theory)
Module-4 (10 Hours)
NBFCs; Micro-finance; Leasing & Hire Purchase Banking:
NBFCs: An Overview -Types of NBFCs in India- Growth, Functions and Regulatory framework.
(Theory)
Micro-finance: The paradigm-NGOs and SHGs-Microfinance delivery mechanisms, Models
Services, Challenges. -Future of Micro finance(Theory)
Leasing & Hire Purchase: Nature and scope of leasing, Types of leasing, Problems in Evaluation of
Leasing. Nature and forms of Hire purchase agreements, Problems in Evaluation of Hire Purchase.
(Theory and Problems)
Module-5 (8 Hours)
01.02.2023

Credit Rating; Venture Capital; Depository System, Securitization of Debt:

Credit Rating: Meaning, Process, Methodology, Agencies And Symbol
Venture Capital: Concept, features, Process ,Stages. Private equity- Investment banking perspectives
in private equity. Performance of Venture Capital Funded Companies In India.(Theory)
Depository System: Objectives of Depository System, Activities, NSDL& CDSL. Process of
Clearing and Settlement.
Securitization of Debt: Meaning, process, Types, Benefits. (Theory)
Module-6 (8 Hours)
Mutual Funds -Meaning, Structure, Functions, Participants, Types of Funds, Types of Schemes,
Performance of Mutual Funds, Factors contributing for the growth of mutual funds in India,
Marketing of mutual funds. (Theory)
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,

field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 80 percent theory and 20 percent problem in SEE.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Financial services by Khan M.Y, McGraw Hill Education, 6th Edition,2011.
2. Banking and Financial Services by Mukund Sharma, Himalaya Publishing House, 2015
3. Management of Banking and Financial services by Padmalatha Suresh & Justin Paul, Pearson.
3rd Edition
4. Financial Markets and Services by K. Natarajan, E. Gordan, Himalaya Publishing House, 2009.
5. Merchant Banking and Financial Services by Madhu Vij, SwatiDhawan, McGraw Hill
Education, 2nd Edition

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 RBI, NSE India, BSE India, Investing.com, Moneycontrol.com
Skill Development Activities Suggested
● Analyze and compare the Performance of Public, private sector and foreign banks operating
in India by Comparing the Bank ratios
● Issue management: Study the recent public issues
● Understand the Venture capital funding and start up challenges in India
● Visit any Microfinance institution or SHG understand the funding process.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 The Student will be acquainted to various Banking and Non-Banking L1
financial services in India.
CO2 The Student will understand the activities of Merchant Banking and credit L3
rating.
CO3 The Student will be equipped to understand micro financing and other L2
financial services in India
CO4 The Student will understand how to evaluate and compare leasing & hire L4
purchase
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3
CO2 1 3 2
CO3 1 3 3
CO4 1 3 3
01.02.2023

3rd Semester MBA HR Electives

RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION
Course Code 22MBAHR303 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning Objectives:
This course will enable the students
 To recite the theories and various steps involved in Recruitment and Selection
 To describe and explain in her/his own words, the relevance and importance of Recruitment
and Selection in the Organization
 To apply and solve the workplace problems through Recruitment and Selection intervention
 To classify and categorize in differentiating between the best method to be adopted by
organization related to Recruitment and Selection
 To compare and contrast different approaches of Recruitment and Selection framework for
solving the complex issues and problems
 To design and develop an original framework and framework in dealing with the problems in
the organization.
Module-1 (8 Hours)
Workforce Planning and Recruitment Analytics:
Concept of Work, Organisation’s Work and Jobs; Millennials at the work place; Key Characteristics
of Millennials; Types of Millennial; The Evolution of Work Structure; Organising the Work;
Strategic Job Redesign and Its Benefits; Strategic Issues in Recruitment; What make Bad
Recruitment; Overview of the Hiring Process; Recruitment Metrics; Factors Affecting Recruitment;
Recruitment Strategy: An Internal Approach; Recruitment Strategy: An External Approach; Legal
and Ethical Considerations; Organisational Best Practices.

Module-2 (9 Hours)
Job Analysis, Job Description and Job Design:
Identify the Job to Examine; Determine Appropriate Information Sources and Collect Job-Related
Data; Job Description; Competency and Competency Ice Berg Model; Why Competency Based
Recruitment; Sources of Recruitment; Different steps of job search; Motivational Job Specification;
Creation of Functional Specification; Creation of Behavioural Specification; Employer branding;
Social Media; Job Design.
Module-3 (9 Hours)
Job Evaluation:
The Job Evaluation Process; Obtain Job KSAOs, Qualifications, Working Conditions, and Essential
Duties; Examine Compensable Factors Using the Rating/Weighting Evaluation Method; Determine
Overall Job Value; Hay Group—Pioneer in Job Evaluation; Determining Compensation using Job
Evaluation Data; Legal and Ethical Considerations for Job Evaluation; Online Salary Survey.

Module-4 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Selection and Interview Strategy:

Interview Strategy and Process; Millennials shaping the Recruitment landscape in the organizations;
Strategies for recruiting and selecting Generation Y into the workforce Developing Effective.
Interviewers; Interviewing Techniques; Legal and Ethical Considerations in the Interview Process;
The overall BEI Process; Assessment Centre’s; Simulations.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
Testing and Assessment:
Testing in Occupational Selection; Test related to Assessment of Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities;
Personality Assessment; The Birkman method and MBTI® comparison; FIRO-B; Honesty and
Integrity Assessment; Various Non-Interviewing Methods; Graphology; Skills Assessment; Games
and Group Activity for Leadership Assessment; Administration of Tests and Assessments; Key
Interviewer Skills.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Making the Hire; Assessment of Candidate and Job Fit:
Unique Recruitment strategies; Biodata and Application Forms; Implications of Using Social Media
Content in Hiring Decisions; Background Checks; Reference Checks; Pre-employment Testing;
Making a Job Offer; Transitioning from Job Candidate to Employee; Induction; Placement.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. How to Recruit, Incentives and Retain Millennials., Rohtak, Sage Publications, 2019.
2. Recruitment and Selection- Strategies for Workforce Planning & Assessment, Carrie A.
Picardi, Sage Publication, 2019.
3. Human Resource Management, R. C. Sharma, Sage Publication, 2019.
4. Human Resource Management, Amitabha Sengupta, Sage Publication, 2018.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.pdfdrive.com/employee-recruitment-selection-and-assessment-e47851497.html
 https://asiajobsinc.com/ebook/1202894721.pdf
 https://core.ac.uk/download/pdf/29818879.pdf
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NcGtVXmcfTQ
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z3lOca6YVSc
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IeabqeaBTbY

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Design and Job Advertisement and Calculate the Cost; Paper Print mode; Social Media
formalities.
 Meet a Manager (which ever stream), interact and design and JD for that role.
 Meet HR Manager / Officer, and ask Best 10 Interview Questions they ask during Candidate
interaction.
 Visit HR department, and take part on shortlisting/ Scrutiny the CV.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Gain the practical insight of various principles and practices of recruitment L2
and selection.
CO2 Acquire knowledge of latest conceptual framework used in recruitment and L2
selection process and procedure applied in various industries.
CO3 Illustrate the application of recruitment and selection tools and techniques L4
in various sectors.
CO4 Develop a greater understanding about strategies for workforce planning L5
and assessment, analyse the hiring management system followed in various
industries.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

Industrial Relations And legislations

Course Code 22MBAHR304 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning Objectives:
This course will enable the students
 To describe and Identify the application of Labour Laws regulating Industrial Relations in
Organisation
 To describe and explain in her/his own words, the relevance and importance of Labour Laws
and Industrial Relations in Organisation
 To apply and solve the workplace problems through Labour Laws
 To classify and categorise different Laws and Codes
 To create and reconstruct Industrial Relations System to be adopted in the Organisation
 To appraise and judge the practical applicability of Labour Laws regulating Industrial
Relations in Organisation
Module-1 (9 Hours)
Introduction – Industrial Relation: Definitions, Scope, Objectives, Types, Characteristics,
Importance, approaches of Industrial Relations, Model of Industrial relations, Recent Trends in
Industrial Relations, Managing IR Changes. The Participants of Industrial Relation Activities.

Module-2 (9 Hours)
Evolution of Labour Legislation in India - History of Labour Legislation in India, Objectives of
Labour Legislation, Types of Labour Legislations in India, Constitutional Provisions for the
Protection of Labour Workforce in India, Rights of Woman Workers; The Present Labour Laws and
Codes. Concept and steps of Grievance, Need for a Grievance Redressal procedure, Legislative
aspects of the grievance redressal procedure in India, Model of Grievance redressal Procedure.

Module-3 (9 Hours)
Collective bargaining: Concept – function and Importance – principles and forms of Collective
bargaining, importance of Collective Bargaining, Process of Collective Bargaining, Negotiation,
form of negotiation
Workers’ Discipline Management, causes of indiscipline, disciplinary Action - service rules,
misconduct, investigation of allegations, showcase notice, charge sheet, domestic enquiry, Report of
findings, punishments to be imposed. Workers participation In Management.
Module-4 (9 Hours)
Introduction to Employee Relation, meaning and significance of employee relation in industry,
Advantages and limitations of maintaining employee relations through unions. Legal provisions to
maintain employee relation- works committee, conciliation, board of conciliation, voluntary
arbitration, and adjudication.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
Factory Act 1948, Contract labour Act (Regulation and Abolition)Act 1970, The Payment of Wages
Act, 1936 – the Minimum Wages Act, 1948.
01.02.2023

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Industrial Dispute Act 1947, Trade Union act 1926. Employee State Insurance Act 1948, Employee
Compensation Act 1923, Maternity Benefit Act 1961, Employee provident Fund and Miscellaneous
Provisions Act 1952 , Gratuity Act 1972, Bonus Act 1965.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Industrial relation, S. Venkata Ratam and Manoranjan Dhal, Oxford Publicatio, 2017 (2nd
edition).
2. Essentials of HRM and Industrial Relation, Rao, P Subba, Himalaya Publishing House, 2013
(5th edition).
3. Industrial Relations, Trade Union and Labour Legislation. PRN Sinha, Indu Bala Sinha,
Seema Shekhar, Pearson, 2017 (3rd edition).
4. Industrial Relations and Labour Laws-Emerging Paradigms, B.D.Singh, Excel Book, 2008.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=P29Cp35JqGA
 http://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110105069/L22.html
 https://www.buytestseries.com/OnlineCourses/Industrial-Relations-MBA-Video-Lecture-
Online
 http://www.nitttrc.edu.in/nptel/courses/video/110105069/L22.html
 https://www.icsi.edu/media/webmodules/publications/7.%20Industrial,%20Labour%20and
%20General%20Laws.pdf
 https://odl.ptu.ac.in/SLM/mba/4th/BOOK%20MBA%20968.pdf
 https://www.scribd.com/document/435959602/Industrial-Relations-and-Labour-Laws-6th-S-
C-Srivastava-1-pdf
 http://www.gopalancolleges.com/gcem/course-material/mba/hr-subjects/industrial-
regulations-legislation-14MBAHR301.pdf

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Visit any factory and understand their Grievance redressal Procedure.
 Discuss with IR Manager/ Factory Manager of two manufacturing firms and review the process
of strikes and lockout they had in last decade. Prepare a report on the same.
 Discuss with IR Manager of two national Banks and review the process of Trade unions they
have had in the last decade. Prepare a report on the same.
 Visit Any Organisation and discuss the applicability of Laws at the workplace.
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Gain practical experience related to labour legislations in India across L2
various sectors.
CO2 Acquire conceptual knowledge of Industrial relations and labour laws L2
followed within industries.
CO3 Develop the greater understanding of IR concepts and its application in L4
solving various issues in IR.
CO4 Apply the IR and labour laws concepts in various industries in India. L5
01.02.2023

Mapping of COs and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO

1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT

Course Code 22MBAHR305 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
 The student will be able to describe and identify the application of various OC/D
framework
 The student will be able to describe and explain in her/his own words, the relevance and
importance of various OC/D intervention to be adopted in the Organisation
 The student will be able to apply and improve the workplace effectiveness through various
OC/D Intervention
 The student will be able to classify and categorise different OC/D practices and
intervention followed in the Organisation
 The student will be able to create and reconstruct OC/D intervention and process required
to manage the Organisation
 The student will be able to appraise and judge the practical applicability of various OC/D
intervention, process and practices to be followed in the Organisation
Module-1 7 hours
Changing Organisations: Nature of 21st Century Organisation, Defining Organisational Change,
The Roots of Organisation Change, Environmental Forces, Driving Change Today, The
Implications of Worldwide Trends for Change Management, Four Types of Organisational
Change, Planned Changes and Intended Results, Organisation Change Roles, Change Initiators,
Change Implementers, Change Facilitators, Change Recipients, The Requirements for Becoming a
Successful Change Leader, Application of Lewin’s Model of Change, OD Practitioners.

Module -2 9 hours
Building and Energising the Need for Change: Organisations as Systems, Levels and
Characteristics of Organisational Change, Models of Organisational Change, Systems Theory
and Social Construction Approaches, Developing a Knowledge for the Need for Change, Seek
Out and Make Sense of Internal - External Data, The Organisations’ Readiness for Change,
Creating Awareness of the Need for Change, Factors That Block People From Recognising the
Need for Change, Creating a Powerful Vision for Change, The Difference Between an
Organisational Vision and a Change Vision

Module -3 9 hours
Measuring Change: Designing Effective Control Systems: Using Control Processes to
Facilitate Change, Selecting and Deploying Measures, Use Measures that Lead to Challenging but
Achievable Goals, Use Measures and Controls that are Perceived as Fair and Appropriate, Ensure
Accurate Data, Control Systems and Change Management, Controls During Design and Early
Stages of the Change Project, Measurement Tools to use in Change Process, Strategy Maps, The
Balanced Scorecard, Risk Exposure Calculator, Organisational Change Agent, Orienting Yourself
to Organisation Change, Data Gathering, Diagnosis and Feedback.
Module -4 9 hours
01.02.2023

Models of Change: Kurt Lewin’s Three-step Model (1950–1952), Six-box Model of Marvin
Weisbord, The McKinsey 7-S Model, Huse’s Model of Planned Organizational Change, Action
Research Model, David Nadler and Michael Tushman Model , Porras and Silvers Model (1991),
The Burke–Litwin Causal Model, John Kotter’s Eight-step Theory , Organizational Intelligence
Model (2004), Managing Change with ADKAR Model, Integrated Model of Change ,
Comparison and Critical Analysis of Change Models Plan the Work, Selecting the Correct Path,
Engage Others in Action Planning, Working the Plan Ethically and Adaptively, Developing a
Communication Plan, Key Principles in Communicating for Change, Transition Management.
Ensure Alignment in Your Action Planning, Action Planning Tools: 1) To-Do Lists; 2)
Responsibility Charting; 3) Contingency Planning; 4) Surveys and Survey Feedback;5) Project
Planning and Critical Path Methods;6) Force Field and Stakeholder Analysis; 7) Leverage
Analysis and 8) Other Change-Management Tools.
Module -5 9 hours
Organisation Development (OD): 7 hours Concept of O D, History of O D, OD in India, OD
Activities, Values, Beliefs and Assumptions of OD, Laboratory Training and T-Groups Action
Research and Survey Feedback, Employee Involvement, Organisational Culture, Reengineering
Organisational Learning, Organisational Effectiveness and Employee Engagement, Defining
Values, Values Important to the OD Practitioner, Core Values of O D, Changes to OD Values,
Values Statement of O D, Ethical Issues of OD.
Module – 6 7 hours
OD Practitioner and Consulting Process: Changing Workforce Demographics, Changing
Nature of Work, The Consulting Relationship and Types of Consulting, Consulting Model, OD
Practitioners, The Organisation Development Consulting Profession, The OD Consulting Process
and Action Research, Data Gathering - Data Gathering Methods and Process, Ethical Issues With
Data Gathering, Diagnosis and Feedback, assessment, Ethical Issues With Diagnosis and Giving
Feedback, OD Intervention-Team Interventions, Quality, Performance Management,
Communication in OD process, Coaching, Mentoring, 360 Feedback, Career Planning and
Development. Merger and Acquisition, Organisational Health, OD Association in India
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam
(SEE) is 50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum
passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have
satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the
student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and
SEE (Semester End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral
examination, field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective
course. Course instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject
relevance and should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight
is compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
7. Change Management and Organisational Development Ratan Raina SAGE Texts 2018
8. Organisational Change- An Action Oriented Toolkit Gene Deszca, Cynthia Ingols, Tupper
F. Cawsey SAGE Publications, Inc 2019
9. Organisation Development: The process of Leading Organisational Change Donald L.
Anderson Sage Publication India Pvt. Ltd. 2/e, 2012
10. Organisation Development Donald L. Anderson SAGE South Asia 2013
11. Toolkit for Organisational Change T. F. Cawsey, Gene Deszca SAGE Text 2007
12. Organisation Development and Organisational Change Donald L. Anderson and Tupper F.
Cawsey SAGE Publications 1/e, 2014

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/353915158_ORGANIZATIONAL_CHANGE_
AND_DEVELOPMENT
 https://www.msmgf.org/files/msmgf/documents/org_dev/organisationalchange and
development.pdf
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/324166817_organisational_change_and_develop
ment

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used
with due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

1. A visit to Organisation and interact with OD and Change Manager and list out the roles
played by OD/C manager.
2. Meet and interact with OD and Change Manager and ask- 10 questions related to Change
and Development issues
3. Meet OD and Change Manager and list out various OC/D Intervention practised and how
they impact the Organisational Growth
4. Visit Organisation and Interact with Employees in the organisation and discuss Culture
Impact on Change process and how it can be managed.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 Gain conceptual insight of change management models, OD L1
processes and interventions.
CO2 Develop the understanding of OD to apply OD aspects in private and L3
public sectors in India.
CO3 Analyse the tools and techniques available to implement changes in L2
the organization environment.
CO4 Handle the OD interventions by analysing the role of OD consultant. L4
Mapping of COS and POs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

COMPENSATION AND REWARD MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBAHR306 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 The student will be able to describe and identify the application of Compensation Management
in the Organisation
 The student will be able to describe and explain in her/his own words, the relevance and
importance of Compensation Management in the Organisation
 The student will be able to apply and solve the workplace problems through application of
Compensation Management
 The student will be able to classify and categories different models and approaches of
Compensation Management adopted in the Organisation
 The student will be able to formulate and prepare Compensation Management to be adopted in
the Organisation
 6. The student will be able to design and develop an original framework and model in dealing
with compensation problems in the organisation.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Compensation: Compensation, Meaning of compensation, Total Compensation/Reward and Its Components
and Types, Importance of the Total Compensation Approach, Wages/Salaries, Some Other Terms, Theories of
Wages, Does Compensation Motivate Behaviour?, Compensation Philosophy, Compensation Strategy,
Compensation Policy, Base of Compensation Management, The Psychological Contract, Compensation and
Legal Issues in Compensation Management, Factors Affecting Employee Compensation/Wage Rates/Wage
Structure/Levels of Pay.
Module-2 (7 Hours)
Compensation Management: Meaning of Compensation Management, Methods of Wage Payment,
Essentials of a Satisfactory Wage System, National Wage Policy in India, Wage Policy at the Organisational
Level, Wage Problems in India, Components/Functions of Compensation Management/W&S Admin,
Divergent Systems and Institutions for Wage Fixation in India.

Module -3 (9 Hours)
Wage Determination Practices: Divergent Systems for Wage Determination in Practice in Indian
Organisations Introduction, Management’s Strategy, Reward Policy, Reward Management Processes, Reward
Management Procedures, Pay Reviews, Planning and Implementing Pay Reviews, Procedures for Grading Jobs
and Pay, Rates Fixation, Controlling Payroll Costs, Evaluation of Reward Processes, Some Other Trends,
Boardroom Pay; Divergent Systems and Institutions for Wage Fixation in Practice in India, Management
Strategy; Fringe Benefits, Fringe Benefits and Current Practices, Internal Audit of Compensation and Benefits;
Different types of Direct and Indirect compensation include: Base Pay / Base pay; Commissions; Overtime
Pay; Bonuses, Profit Sharing, Merit Pay; Stock Options; Travel/Meal/Housing Allowance; Benefits including:
dental, insurance, medical, vacation, leaves, retirement, taxes; Merit pay; Incentive Pay; Deferred Pay ; Pay for
time; Recreational facilities
Module-4 (9 Hours)
01.02.2023

Contingent Pay, Pay for Performance, Competence: Competency-Based Pay, Skill-Based Pay, Team-
Based Rewards, Gainsharing, Profit-Sharing Profit-Related Pay and Beyond Other Cash Payments and
Allowances Overtime Payments Attendance Bonuses, Shift Pay, Clothing Allowances, Honoraria, Payments
for Qualifications, Pay for Person, Pay for Excellence, Managerial Compensation and Rewards, Sales Force
Incentive Programmes, Competency based Pay- Framework, Model and Challenges; Pay for Performance :
Steps involved in the design for pay for performance - Intent ; Eligibility; Participation; Performance and Goal
Criteria-Measurements ; Funding; Pay Outs and Timing; Benefits Impact & Administration; Evaluation.
Module-5 (9 Hours)
Administration & Controlling Salary Costs and Salary Review: Salary Survey data, Salary Costs, Salary
Planning, Salary Budget, Salary Control, Salary Reviews, Guidelines for Salary Review Process, Responding
to Negative Salary Review, Five Key Steps: Manager’s Guide to Annual Salary Review, Fixing of Salary,
Method of Paying Salary, Flexibility, Process of Wage and Salary Fixation.
Module-6 (9 Hours)
Operating, Non-financial Benefits(Intrinsic and Relational Rewards: Role of Non-financial
Benefits/Rewards on Employee Motivation, Types of Non-financial Benefits/Rewards, Planning the Non-
financial Benefits/Rewards, A Few Most Effective Non-Financial Benefits/Rewards to Motivate Employees,
Heineken’s Refreshing Approach to Reward, Non-financial Metrics Intellectual Capital Assessment and
Market Implications of Human Capital, Recognition, Praise, Learning and Development, Achievement, Value
Addition in Personality Others.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Compensation Management: R. C. Sharma, Sulabh Sharma Sage Publication India Pvt.Ltd
Edition 2019
2. Compensation and Benefit: Biswas, Bashker, D Pearson, edition 2013
3. Managing Employees Performance and Rewards: Shields Cambridge Press, edition 2007
4. Human Resource Information Systems: Basics, Applications, and FutureDirections: Michael J.
Kavanagh, Mohan Thite, Richard D. Johnson, Sage Publication India Pvt.Ltd , 3/e, 2015
5. Competency-Based Human Resource Management: AnindyaBasu Roy, SumatiRaym, Sage
Publication India Pvt. Ltd, 2019
6. Compensation and Reward Management: Singh, B D , Excel Books -2007
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
01.02.2023

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yml9dx9nUco
 https://hr-gazette.com/total-rewards-and-compensation-understanding - the essentials/
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ax7suq7w4cm
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=g4AGhGehhsc
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/325959515_impact_of_compensation_and_benefits_
on_job_satifaction

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Understand the theoretical and practical aspects in the area of compensation and benefits.
 Exposure to MS-Excel or HRIS packages recommended.
 Acquire knowledge of compensation and reward system policies, processes, and procedure.
 Apply the concepts of compensation administration and intrinsic and extrinsic reward system
in national and global perspective.
 Analyse the divergent system and wage determination practices followed in various sectors.
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Gain insights of various conceptual aspects of Compensation and Benefits to L1
achieve organizational goals
CO2 Determine the performance-based compensation system for business excellence L3
and solve various casesand can compose the business letters in English precisely
and effectively.
CO3 Designing the compensation strategies for attraction, motivation and retaining L2
high quality workforce.
CO4 Understand the Legal & Administrative Issues in global compensation to prepare L4
compensation plan, CTC, wage survey and calculate various bonus.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

3rd Semester MBA Business Analytics Electives

Introduction to Python, Data and Control Systems

Course Code 22MBABA303 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 3:0:1 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To understand python programming
 To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and call them.
 To use Python data structures – lists, tuples, dictionaries and do with input / output with files
in Python.
Module-1 Introduction to Python Program 8Hrs
Introduction to Python Program: Creativity and motivation, Computer hardware architecture, understanding
programming, word and sentence, Conversing with Python, Terminology, Debugging, The learning journey.
Module-2 8Hrs
Variables, Expressions and Statements: Python installation data types: Int, float, Boolean, string, and list;
variables, expressions, statements, precedence of operators, comments; modules, function and its use, flow of
execution, parameters and arguments.
Module-3 8Hrs
Control Flow, Loops and Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else),
chained conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: while, for, break, continue.

Module-4 8Hrs
Functions, Arrays andFruitful functions: return values, parameters, local and global scope, function
composition, recursion; Strings: string slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module;
Python arrays, Access the Elements of an Array, array methods.
Module-5 10Hrs
Lists, Tuples, Dictionaries: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning
lists, list parameters, list comprehension; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value, tuple comprehension;
Dictionaries: operations and methods, comprehension;
Module-6 8 Hrs
Files, Exception, Modules, Packages : text files, reading and writing files, command line arguments, errors
and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules (datetime, time, OS , calendar, math module), Explore packages.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:Books

1. ``Think Python: How to Think like a Computer Scientist‘‘, Allen B. Downey, 2nd edition.
2. Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016.
3. “Core Python Programming”, R.Nageswara Rao dream tech.
4. Python Programming: A Modern Approach, Vamsi Kurama, Pearson.
5. Core Python Programming, W.Chun, Pearson.
6. Introduction to Python, Kenneth A. Lambert, Cengage
7. Learning Python, Mark Lutz, Orielly
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
01.02.2023

 www.Programiz.
 www.CodeCademy
 www.FreeCodeCamp

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to
copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested to:

 Practice on Python software to become Expertise in data visualization process.
 Access to web-frameworks and get motivated to work on analytical tools
 Analyse any big retail chain data using python

Course outcome:
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms Level
No.
CO1 Understand the concepts of python programming L1
CO2 Structure a simple Python programs for solving problems. L2
CO3 Apply the knowledge to decompose a Python program into functions. L3
CO4 Analyse and Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries. L4
CO5 Read and write data form/to files in Python Program.

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code 22MBABA304 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To make students to understand data analysis and visualization process
 To make students to use tools to extract trends from existing data to drive business decisions
 To make students to analyze and to visualize different characteristics of a data set.
 To make students to develop summarized reports
Module-1 8 Hours
Introduction to Data Mining: Applications- Nature of The Problem- Classification Problems in
Real Life- Email Spam, Handwritten Digit Recognition, Image segmentation, Speech Recognition,
DNA Expression Microarray, DNA Sequence Classification. Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA)-
What is Data- Numerical Summarization - Measures of Similarity and Dissimilarity, Proximity-
Distance- Euclidean Distance, Minkowski Distance, Mahalanobis Distance Visualization- Tools for
Displaying Single Variables - Tools for Displaying Relationships Between Two Variables - Tools
for Displaying More Than Two Variables
R Scripts- R Library: ggplot2-R Markdown
Module-2 8 Hours
Statistical Learning and Model Selection: Prediction Accuracy - Prediction Error, Training and
Test Error as A Function of Model Complexity, Over fitting a Model, Bias-Variance Trade-off,
Cross Validation- Holdout Sample: Training and Test Data, Three-way Split: Training, Validation
and Test Data, Cross-Validation, Random Sub sampling, K-fold Cross-Validation, Leave-One-Out
Cross-Validation with examples for each.
Module-3 8 Hours
Linear Regression and Variable Selection: Meaning- Review Expectation, Variance, Frequentist
Basics, Parameter Estimation, Linear Methods, Point Estimate, Example Results, Theoretical
Justification, R Scripts.
Variable Selection- Variable Selection for the Linear Model, R Scripts.
Module-4 9 Hours
Regression Shrinkage Methods and Tree based method: Meaning, Types- Ridge Regression,
Compare Squared Loss for Ridge Regression, More on Coefficient Shrinkage, The Lasso.
Tree Based Methods- Construct the Tree, The Impurity Function, Estimate the Posterior
Probabilities of Classes in Each Node, Advantages of the Tree-Structured Approach, Variable
Combinations, Missing Values, Right Sized Tree via Pruning, Bagging and Random Forests, R
Scripts, Bagging, From Bagging to Random Forests, Boosting
Module-5 10 Hours
01.02.2023

Principal Components Analysis and Classification: Singular Value Decomposition (SVD),

Principal Components, Principal Components Analysis(PCA), Geometric Interpretation, Acquire
Data, Classification - Classification Error Rate, Bayes Classification Rule, Linear Methods for
Classification, Logistic Regression - Assumptions, Comparison with Linear Regression on
Indicators- Fitting based on Optimization Criterion, Binary Classification, Multiclass Case (K ≥ 3),
Discriminant Analysis - Class Density Estimation, Linear Discriminant Analysis, Optimal
Classification
Module-6 7 Hours
Support Vector Machines: Overview, When Data is Linearly Separable, Support Vector Classifier,
When Data is NOT Linearly Separable, Kernel Functions, Multiclass SVM.
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:Books

1. John W. Tukey “Exploratory Data Analysis”, 1st Edition, ISBN13: 978-0201076165, ISBN-
10: 0201076160
2. Foster Provost and Tom Fawcett. “Data Science for Business: What you need to know about
data mining and data-analytic thinking”. O'Reilly Media, latest edition, ISBN-13: 978-
1449361327
3. Hadley Wickham, Garrett Grolemund."R for Data Science: Import, Tidy, Transform,
Visualize, and Model Data", Publisher: "O'Reilly Media, Inc.", 2016, ISBN 1491910364,
9781491910368
4. Cathy O'Neil, Rachel Schutt. "Doing Data Science: Straight Talk from the Frontline",
Publisher: "O'Reilly Media, Inc.", 2013, ISBN 144936389X, 9781449363895

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKEtWRgvdiaAQVgLW7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG
9zAzQEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660416785/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2farchiv
e.org%2fdetails%2fexploratorydataa0000tuke_7616/RK=2/RS=5BVZN5konKiTESg8jAvGK
Fu9qtw-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKEtWRgvdiaAQVf7W7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG
9zAzMEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660416785/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fjhu-
advdatasci.github.io%2f2019%2flectures%2fEDA.pdf/RK=2/RS=pupbdtbn2rtanCvRHfwBi9l
WxMk-
Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested:

 To conduct explorative research to collect data and analyse using statistical tools like excel
and SPSS
 Interpret the data objectively and prepare report

Course outcome :
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand Data Mining and its importance . L2
CO2 Apply knowledge of research design for business problems L3
CO3 Analyze the cause and effect relationship between the variables from the L4
analysis
CO4 Evaluate Regression and decision tree based methodsto solve business L5
problems
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 2

CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

BUSINESS ANALYTICS AND INTELLIGENCE

Course Code 22MBABA305 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To impart the skills needed to manage database of large scale organization, techniques for data
mining.
 To become familiar with the processes needed to develop, report, and analyse business data.
 To provide a comprehensive introduction to various visualization techniques.
 To focus on solving problems around Data Processing and Analysis
 To provide a comprehensive introduction to various visualization techniques.
 To focus on solving problems around Data Processing and Analysis
Module-1 7 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS ANALYTICS: What is business analytics? Historical
Overview of data analysis, Data Scientist vs. Data Engineer vs. Business Analyst, Career in Business
Analytics.
Module-2 8 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE: Meaning, Purpose and Structure of
Business Intelligence Systems. Understanding Multidimensional Analysis Concepts: Attributes,
Hierarchies and Dimensions in data Analysis. Understanding Dimensional Data Warehouse: Fact
Table, Dimension Tables, Surrogate Keys and Alternative Table Structure. What is multi-dimension
OLAP?
Module-3 10 Hours
BUSINESS PROBLEM SOLVING AND TABULEAU: Introduction to Tableau, Evaluation of
Tableau, Tableau Architecture and Installation of Tableau. Data analysis and data communication
with Tableau. Tableau public and desktop. Knowing Your Data, importing data, the “Data
Visualization Process”, table view, Dashboard, Tableau Basics: Dimensions, Measures, Tableau
Workspace, cards and shelves, marks card, formatting how to analyse structured data using Tableau,
exporting data.
Module-4 9 Hours
BUSINESS PROBLEM SOLVING AND VISUALISATION USING TABULEAU: Visualization
Graphs and Application: using device designer, maps in Tableau, editing unrecognized locations,
custom geocoding, polygon maps, map box integration, types of calculations, calculation syntax.
Module-5 8 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO POWER BI, SQL Server Introduction, Introduction to Power Bi, Basic
Report Design, Visual sync, Grouping, Visualization Properties.
Module-6 8 Hours
VISUALISATION USING POWER BI, Data preparation, Visualizing data in charts and tables,
01.02.2023

Relationships in tables, Spatial visualization.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures not
less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End
Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced
to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Recommended Books
1. Business Intelligence and Analytics: Systems for Decision Support : by Ramesh Sharda,
Pearson.
2. Business Intelligence, Analytics, and Data Science: A Managerial Perspective | Fourth Edition |
By Pearson Paperback by Ramesh Sharda / DursunDelen / Efraim Turban
3. Visual Analytics with Tableau,by Alexander Loth,Wiley
4. Learning Tableau 2020: Create effective data visualizations, build interactive visual analytics,
and transform your organization, 4th Edition,by Joshua N. Milliga
5. Data Visualization: Using Power BI, Orange and Excel- by Dr.Shirshendu Roy , sold
by BOOKNETZ
6. Mastering Power BI- by Chandraish Sinha , Sold by Epitome Books

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awr1Rc1iaPdiPmUT4oa7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zA
zQEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660410083/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fkathterhin.b
logspot.com%2f2014%2f04%2fe673ebook-pdf-ebook-
business.html/RK=2/RS=DeUCJ8WnPRk3QtR2PKX8UhrcJlo-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=Awr1Rc1iaPdiPmUT5Ia7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAz
UEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660410083/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.dbooks
.org%2fessentials-of-business-analytics-
3319688375%2f/RK=2/RS=wLsmGpjOzEUsZbRxxpLPf_1_m88-

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 To visit the business organisation and understand the Business Intelligence and Analytics
 Suggested to work on data collected for research using excel and SPSS
 Suggested to get acquainted with statistical tools like R and Tableau for data visualisation.
Course outcome :
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 To understand concepts of business analytics and business intelligence L2
CO2 To apply the knowledge of the processes needed to develop, report, and L3
analyse business data.
CO3 Analyse data using Excel and Excel add-ins to solve business problems. L4
CO4 Evaluate the Data Structure and pattern for Decision making in business L5
management

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

Marketing, Web and Social Media Analytics

Course Code 22MBABA306 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 4:0:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 50 Total Marks 100
Credits 04 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
• To make students to understand Web marketing and digital marketing concepts.
• To make students to apply knowledge of web marketing for data analysis
• To make students to analyze social media like Facebook analytics
• To make students to use statistical tools for data analysis
Module-1 7 Hours
Meaning and nature of marketing, Importance, Objectives of marketing, Marketing v/s
Selling, E- Business, Marketing Environment – Features, importance, Components of
Marketing Environment. Emerging areas of Marketing – Neuro Marketing, Sensory
Marketing. Marketing Ethics - Green marketing and green economy. Contemporary Indian
Marketing Environment, Recent trends in Marketing.
Module-2 9 Hours
Prediction Accuracy: - Prediction Error, Training and Test Error as A Function of Model
Complexity, Over fitting a Model, Bias-Variance Trade-off
Cross Validation- Holdout Sample: Training and Test Data, Three-way Split: Training,
Validation and Test Data, Cross-Validation, Random Sub sampling, K-fold Cross-Validation,
Leave-One-Out Cross-Validation with examples for each
Module-3 9 Hours
Linear Regression and Variable Selection: Meaning- Review Expectation, Variance,
Frequentist Basics, Parameter Estimation, Linear Methods, Point Estimate, Example Results,
Theoretical Justification, R Scripts Variable Selection- Variable Selection for the Linear
Model, R Scripts
Module-4 9 Hours
Regression Shrinkage Methods and Tree based method: Types- Ridge Regression, Compare
Squared Loss for Ridge Regression, More on Coefficient Shrinkage, The Lasso
Tree Based Methods- Construct the Tree, The Impurity Function, Estimate the Posterior
Probabilities of Classes in Each Node, Advantages of the Tree-Structured Approach, Variable
Combinations, Missing Values, Right Sized Tree via Pruning, Bagging and Random Forests, R
Scripts, Bagging, From Bagging to Random Forests, Boosting
Module-5 9 Hours
Principal Components, Principal Components Analysis(PCA): Geometric Interpretation,
Acquire Data Classification - Classification Error Rate, Bayes Classification Rule, Linear
Methods for Classification, Logistic Regression - Assumptions, Comparison with Linear
Regression on Indicators- Fitting based on Optimization Criterion, Binary Classification,
01.02.2023

Multiclass Case (K ≥ 3),

Discriminant Analysis - Class Density Estimation, Linear Discriminant Analysis, Optimal
Classification, Binary Classification, Estimating the Gaussian Distributions.

Module-6 7 Hours
Support Vector Machines: Overview, When Data is Linearly Separable, Support Vector
Classifier, When Data is NOT Linearly Separable, Kernel Functions, Multiclass SVM.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam
(SEE) is 50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks.
Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be
deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous
Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral
examination, field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective
course. Course instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the
subject relevance and should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number
eight is compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources: Books

1. Social Media Analytics Strategy: Using Data To Optimize Business Performance by
Gonçalves, Publisher: Apress.
2. Social Media Analytics - Techniques and Insights for Extracting Business Value Out of
Social Media 1 Edition (English, Paperback, AvinashKohirkar, Matthew Ganis, Ed Brill)
, Publisher: Pearson.
3. Marketing to the Social Web: How Digital Customer Communities Build Your Business,
By Larry Weber; Publisher: Pearson.
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

• https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC2owifdiw70UiEG7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzME
cG9zAzQEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660418481/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%
2fconnect.darden.virginia.edu%2fmrktngebook/RK=2/RS=S9yskCsL8By_vrVii_iQYKa
onLc-

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to
copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

• Observe Facebook insights and understand how retailers use those insights for business
purposes
• Analyse the Amazon .com promotions and web marketing strategies
• Analyse the digital and social media marketing strategies to increase sale volume and
profit
Course outcomes:
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand the concepts of Marketing L2

CO2 Apply of knowledge on data analysis in Facebook and web L3

CO3 Analyse the usage of digital platforms for business purpose L4

CO4 Evaluate the business models with integration of technology L5

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

GUIDELINES FOR INTERNSHIP 22MBA IN 307

(BETWEEN 2ND AND 3RD SEMESTER MBA)

INTERNSHIP
Course Code 22MBAIN307 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 0:8:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 00 Total Marks 100
Credits : 04 Exam Hours 00
OBJECTIVE
To expose the students to understand the working culture of the organization and apply
theoretical concepts in real life situation at the work place for various functions of the
organization.
STRUCTURE
The Internship shall consist of study of an organization for 4 credits for 4 weeks.
GENERAL GUIDELINES
 The Internship shall be for a period of 4 weeks immediately after the completion of 2 nd
Semester Examinations but before the commencement of the 3rd semester classes
 The Course code of the Internship shall be 20MBA IN 307 and shall be compulsory for all
the students.
 No two students of an institute shall work on the same organization.
 The student shall seek the guidance of the internal guide on a continuous basis, and the
guide shall give a certificate to the effect that the candidate has worked satisfactorily under
his/her guidance. Student need to identify an external guide (Working in the organization)
and seek guidance from him/her.
SUBMISSION OF REPORT
Students shall submit one hard copy of the report to the college with hard bound color of royal
blue and a soft copy in PDF file (Un-editable Format).
EVALUATION
Internal evaluation will be done by the internal guide.
Viva-Voce / Presentation: A viva-voce examination shall be conducted at the respective
institution where a student is expected to give a presentation of his/ her work. The viva –voce
examination will be conducted by the respective HOD or Senior Professor or Internal Guide of
the department and The external guide will be from the industry/ faculty from the other PG
centres of VTU as examiner for the viva voce of Internship.
The affiliated institutions can have the external guide from the industry/ faculty from other VTU
affiliated institutions/ VTU PG Centres. Viva-Voce on internship shall be conducted at the
college and the date of Viva-Voce shall be fixed in consultation with the external Guide. The
Examiners shall jointly award the Viva - Voce marks. In case of non availability of industry
professional, a senior professor or a faculty with more than 10 years of experience may be
invited to conduct the viva-voce examination. Internship carries 100 marks consisting of 50
marks for Internship report (evaluated by internal guide) and 50 marks for viva-voce
examination.
01.02.2023

CONTENTS OF THE INTERNSHIP REPORT

 Cover page
 Certificate from the Organization (scanned copy)
 Certificate from the guide, HOD and Head of the Institution (scanned copy) indicating
bonafide performance of Internship by the student.
 Declaration by the student ( scanned copy)
 Acknowledgement
 Table of contents
 List of tables and graphs
Executive summary
Chapter 1: Introduction about the Organisation & Industry.
Chapter 2: Organization Profile
i. Back ground,
ii. Nature of business,
iii. Vision mission, quality policy
iv. Workflow model
v. Product/service profile
vi. Ownership pattern
vii. Achievements/awards if any
viii. Future growth and prospects
Chapter 3: Mckensy’s 7S framework and Porter's Five Force Model with special reference to
Organization under study.
Chapter 4: SWOT Analysis
Chapter 5: Analysis of financial statements
Chapter 6: Learning experience.
Bibliography
Annexure relevant to the Internship such as figures, graphs, photographs, Financial statements
etc.,
FORMAT OF THE INTERNSHIP REPORT
Report shall be prepared using the word processor viz., MS Word, Times New Roman font sized
12, on a page layout of A4 size with 1” margin all sides (1.5” on left side due to binding) and
1.5line spacing. The Internship report shall not exceed 60 pages.
01.02.2023

RUBRICS FOR INTERNSHIP 22MBAIN 307

Evaluation
Sl.No. Particulars Marks
Type
Assessment by the Guide- Interaction with the
1 CIE 25
student by Seminars, etc,.
2 CIE Report Evaluation by the Guide 25
Viva-Voce Examination to be conducted by the
Guide
3 SEE 50
and an External examiner from the
Industry/Institute
Total 100

MARK SHEET FOR VIVA VOCE EXAMINATION (SEE)

Visvesvaraya Technological University
Name of the Institution
Name of the Department
Course Code: 22MBA IN 307 and Course Title: Internship

Sl.No. Aspects Marks

1 Introduction and Understanding the Industry 5
2 Understanding the Corporate Functions/Company profile 10
3 Mckensy’s 7S framework and Porter's Five Force Model 10
4 SWOT/SWOC analysis justification 10
5 Financial statement analysis 5
6 Learning experience 10
Total 50

Marks Sheet for Internship Viva Voce examination

Sl.No. USN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total

1
2
3
4
5

Signature of Internal Examiner Signature of External Examiner

Name and Designation with affiliation Name and Designation with affiliation
01.02.2023
01.02.2023

4th Semester MBA Syllabus for Affiliated Colleges- Core Papers

International Business
Course Code 22MBA401 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To explore and offer knowledge on Global Business Environment.
 To explore knowledge on International Institutions involved in global business.
 To assist the students to develop a truly Global Perspective.
 To understand the contemporary issues in global business that illustrates the unique challenges
faced by managers in the IBE.
Module-1 (6 Hours)
Introduction to International Business: Evolution, Meaning, Importance, Nature and Scope of International
Business, Characteristics of International Business, Factors affecting International Business, Changing scenario
of International Business, Advantages of International Business, challenges in International business, Modes of
entry into International Business, Internationalization Process.
Module-2 (7 Hours)
International Business Environment: Introduction, Meaning and Components of International Business
Environment, Political Environment, Legal Environment, Economic Environment, Technological
Environment, Socio and Cultural Environment, Ethics in International Business and CSR in International
Business.
Module-3 (7 Hours)
Theories of International Business: Introduction, Mercantilism, Theory of absolute cost advantage,
Comparative cost advantage theory, Comparative cost advantage with money, Relative factor endowment
theory, Product life cycle theory, Global strategic rivalry theory, Porter’s National Competitive Advantage
Theory.
Module-4 (7 Hours)
International Institutions: UNCTAD- Introduction, Principles and achievements, IMF-Role and objectives,
WTO-Role and advantages, TRIMS, TRIPS Features, Economic Integration-Introduction, Levels of Economic
Integration, Regional Economic Integration in Europe, USA, ASEAN, SAARC, SAPTA.
Module-5 ( 6 Hours)
Multi-National Corporations: Definition and Meaning, factors that contributed to positive growth of MNCs,
Importance of MNCs, Advantages and disadvantages of MNCs, MNCs in India, Organizational structure of
MNCs, Transfer of Technology, Global Competitiveness, Indicators of competitiveness, Technology of Global
competitiveness.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Basics of International Marketing- Environment and cultural dynamics of global markets, functions of
International Marketing, determining International Marketing strategies, Major actors in International
Marketing, Competitive Global Marketing Strategies.
Global HRM- Characteristics, Nature and factors of IHRM, Functions of IHRM,
Global Finance-Features of Global Capital Market, Growth of Global Capital Market, Global equity market.
International Production Management-Coordinating Global Manufacturing System.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
Suggested Learning Resources:
Books
1. The International Business Environment: Anant K. Sundaram/ J. Stewart Black-Prentice Hall.
2. International Business environments and Operations John D Daniel, Lee H Radebaugh, Daniel
P Sulivan- Pearson Education, 10th edition, 2004.
3. International Business (text and cases): P Subba Rao, HPH, 4/e, 2017.
4. The International Business Environment Janet Morrison Mac Millan Palgrave, 2004
5. International Business Environment by Francis Cherunilam- Himalaya Publishing House,
2004.
6. International Business: competing in the global market place, Charles W L Hill, Tata
McGraw-Hill., 5th Edition, 2005.
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
01.02.2023

 https://www.pdfdrive.com/international-business-environment-e56594187.html
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/business-environment-e54194142.html
 https://ebooks.lpude.in/commerce/mcom/term_3/DCOM501_INTERNATIONAL_BUSINESS.pdf
 https://www.yumpu.com/en/document/view/63865501/pdf-download-international-business-case-studies-for-the-
multicultural-marketplace-full-online
 http://elibrary.gci.edu.np/bitstream/123456789/681/1/BM727%20The%20International%20Business%20Environ
ment%20Challenges%20and%20Changes%20by%20Jamie%20Weatherston.pdf
 https://www.taylorfrancis.com/books/edit/10.4324/9780080511306/international-business-case-studies-robert-
moran-david-braaten-ph-john-walsh
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3hMNnvd_HbQ
 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_mg54/preview
 https://www.coursera.org/learn/international-business

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Identify the companies and study the factors affecting their business at international level.
 Study the advantages and disadvantages of various companies operated in different countries.
 Study the various ethical practices adopted by various companies and also issues faced by
them.
 Students must study role of corporate social responsibility (CSR) in international business
practice.
Course outcome (Course Skill Set)
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. No. Description Blooms Level
CO1 Defining international business and describe how it differs from domestic L3
business with respect to laws, regulations and taxation.
CO2 Identify and describe factors and forces that affect an organization’s L3
decision to internationalize its business.
CO3 Describe and compare strategies for internationalization. L3,L2
CO4 Identify and analyze challenges in working, communicating and L3,L4
negotiating in a cross-cultural context.
CO5 Discuss the role of corporate social responsibility (CSR) in international L6
business practice.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
CO5 1 2 3
01.02.2023

INNOVATION AND DESIGN THINKING

Course Code 22MBA402 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To familiarise Design Thinking (DT) and its phases
 To enable the students to become aware of the evolution, concepts & models of Design
Thinking.
 To enable learners with the context, methods and mindsets pertaining to Design Thinking.
 To equip students to the opportunities to ideate and find solutions by applying DT.

Module-1 (6 Hours)
Introduction, Design Thinking as a Solution, The Value of Design Thinking, A Look at the History
of Design Thinking, A Look at the History of Design Thinking, Four Core Principles of Successful
Innovation, A Model of the Design Innovation Process, Seven Modes of the Design Innovation
Process, Understanding Methods.

Module-2 (9 Hours)
Sense Intent: Mindsets, Sensing Changing Conditions, Seeing Overviews, Foreseeing Trends,
Reframing Problems, Forming an Intent, Sense Intent: Methods, Buzz Reports, Popular Media Scan,
Key Facts, Innovation Sourcebook, Trends Expert Interview, Keyword Bibliometrics, Ten Types of
Innovation Framework, Innovation Landscape, Trends Matrix, Convergence Map, From To
Exploration, Initial Opportunity Map, Offering-Activity-Culture Map, Intent Statement.
Know Context: Mindsets, Knowing Context History, Understanding Frontiers, Seeing System
Overviews, Understanding Stakeholders, Using Mental Models, Know Context: Methods,
Contextual Research Plan, Popular Media Search, Publications Research, Eras Map, Innovation
Evolution Map, Financial Profile, Analogous Models, Competitors- Complementors Map, Ten
Types of Innovation Diagnostics, Industry Diagnostics, SWOT Analysis, Subject Matter Experts
Interview, Interest Groups Discussion.

Module-3 (6 Hours)
Know People: Mindsets, Observing Everything, Building Empathy, Immersing in Daily Life,
Listening Openly, Looking for Problems and Needs.
Know People: Methods, Research Participant Map, Research Planning Survey, User Research Plan,
Five Human Factors, POEMS, Field Visit, Video Ethnography, Ethnographic Interview, User Pictures
Interview, Cultural Artifacts, Image Sorting, Experience Simulation, Field Activity, Remote
Research, User Observations Database.

Module-4 (7 Hours)
Frame Insights: Mindsets, Exploring Systems, Looking for Patterns, Constructing Overviews,
Identifying Opportunities, Developing Guiding Principles.
Frame Insights: Methods, Observations to Insights, Insights Sorting, User Observation Database
01.02.2023

Queries, User Response Analysis, ERAF Systems Diagram, Descriptive Value Web, Entities Position
Map, Venn Diagramming, Tree/Semi-Lattice Diagramming, Symmetric Clustering Matrix,
Asymmetric Clustering Matrix, Activity Network, Insights Clustering Matrix, Semantic Profile, User
Groups Definition, Compelling Experience Map, User Journey Map, Summary Framework, Design
Principles Generation, Analysis Workshop.

Module-5 (7 Hours)
Explore Concepts: Challenging Assumptions, Standing in the Future, Exploring Concepts at the
Fringes, Seeking Clearly Added Value, Narrating Stories about the Future.
Explore Concepts: Methods, Principles to Opportunities, Opportunity Mind Map, Value Hypothesis,
Persona Definition, Ideation Session, Concept-Generating Matrix, Concept Metaphors and Analogies,
Role-Play Ideation, Ideation Game, Puppet Scenario, Behavioral Prototype, Concept Prototype,
Concept Sketch, Concept Scenarios, Concept Sorting, Concept Grouping Matrix, Concept Catalog.

Module-6 (6 Hours)
Frame solutions: Mindsets, Conceiving Holistic Solutions, Conceiving Options, Making Value
Judgments, Envisioning Scenarios, Structuring Solutions, Frame solutions: Methods, Morphological
Synthesis, Concept Evaluation, Prescriptive Value Web, Concept-Linking Map, Foresight Scenario,
Solution Diagramming, Solution Storyboard, Solution Enactment, Solution Prototype, Solution
Evaluation, Solution Roadmap, Solution Database, Synthesis Workshop.
Realize Offerings: Mindsets, Reiterating Prototypes, Evaluating in Reality, Defining Strategies,
Implementing in Reality, Communicating Vision, Realize Offerings: Methods, Strategy Roadmap,
Platform Plan, Strategy Plan Workshop, Pilot Development and Testing, Implementation Plan,
Competencies Plan, Team Formation Plan, Vision Statement, Innovation Brief.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Design Thinking for Strategy – Innovating towards Competitive Advantage by Claude Diderich,
Springer, 2020.
2. 101 Design Methods – A Structured Approach to Driving Innovation in your Organization by
Vijay Kumar, John Wiley & Sons,2013.
3. The Design of Business – Why Design Thinking is the next Competitive Advantage by Roger
Martin, Harvard Business Press, 2009.
4. Design Thinking – Integrating innovation, Customer experience, & Brand Value by Thomas
Lockwood, Allworth Press, 2009.
5. Design Thinking Methodology by Emrah Yayici, ArtBizTech, 2016.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mg75/preview
 https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking-resources
 https://www.innovationtraining.org/stanford-design-thinking-resources/
 https://www.teachthought.com/pedagogy/45-design-thinking-resources-for-educators/
 https://theaccidentaldesignthinker.com/design-thinking-tools-resources/

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Visit Startups to comprehend prototype development.
 Observe the innovation and technology synchronisation for creative Design Thinking.
 Conduct interview with the social entrepreneurs and develop the social sustainable prototypes.
 Learn to be a critical thinker and respond to the societal needs.
Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Understand the Design Thinking process from business management L1
perspective.
CO2 Apply the knowledge and skills of DT in prototype development for L3
product/service innovations.
CO3 Analyse sustainable and societal challenges and find solutions. L2
CO4 Evaluate the pros and cons for sustainable development by applying DT. L4

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 2 1 2 2
CO2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 3
01.02.2023

4th Semester MBA Marketing Electives

STRATEGIC BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBAMM403 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To appreciate the relationship between corporate strategy and Brand Management.
 To explore the various issues related to Brand Management, brand association, brand identity,
brand architecture, leveraging brand assets, brand portfolio management.
 To develop familiarity and competence with the strategies and tactics involved in building,
leveraging and defending strong brands in different sectors.
Module-1 (7 Hours)
Introduction: Meaning of Brand, Concepts, Evolution of Brands, Functions of Brand to
consumer, Role of Brand-Advantages of Brand, Product Vs Brand. Branding- Meaning, Creation
of Brands through goods, services, people, Organization, Retail stores, places, online,
entertainment, ideas, challenges to Brand builders. Brand Management-Meaning & Definition.
Strategic Brand Management Process-Meaning, Steps in Brand Management Process, Strong
Indian Brands.
Module-2 (5 Hours)
Meaning, Model of CBBE: Brand Equity: Meaning, Sources, Steps in Building Brands, Brand
building blocks Resonance, Judgments, Feelings, performance, imagery, salience-Brand Building
Implications, David Aaker’s Brand Equity Model. Brand Identity & Positioning: Meaning of Brand
identity, Need for Identity & Positioning, Dimensions of brand identity, Brand identity prism.
Brand positioning: Meaning, Point of parity & Point of difference, positioning guidelines, Brand
Value: Definition, Core Brand values, Brand mantras, Internal branding.

Module-3 (7 Hours)
Meaning of Brand Knowledge: Dimensions of Brand Knowledge, Meaning of Leveraging
Secondary Brand Knowledge & Conceptualizing the leverage process. Criteria for choosing brand
elements, options & tactics for brand elements-Brand name, Naming guidelines, Naming procedure,
Awareness, Brand Associations, Logos & Symbols & their benefits, Characters & Benefits, Slogans
& Benefits, Packaging. Leveraging Brand Knowledge.

Module-4 (7 Hours)
Brand hierarchy, Branding strategy, Brand extension and brand transfer, Managing Brands
overtime. Brand Architecture and brand consolidation. Brand Imitations: Meaning of Brand
Imitation, Kinds of imitations, Factors affecting Brand Imitation, Imitation Vs Later market entry,
01.02.2023

First movers advantages, Free rider effects, Benefits for later entrants, Imitation Strategies.

Module-5 (7 Hours)
Establishing brand Equity Management Systems. Methods for measuring Brand Equity-
Quantitative Techniques & Quantitative Techniques, Making Brands go Global: Geographic
extension, sources of opportunities for global brand, single name to global brand, consumers &
globalization, conditions favoring marketing, barriers to globalization, managerial blockages.
Module-6 (7 Hours)
Global branding: Organization for a global brand, pathways to globalization. Luxury Brand
Management: Luxury definition and relativity, luxury goods and luxury brands, basic psychological
phenomena associated with luxury purchase, luxury marketing mix, luxury retail, international
luxury markets: historical leaders and emerging countries.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books:
1. Strategic Brand Management, Building Measuring & Managing, Kevin Lane Keller, Pearson
Education Latest Edition
2. Strategic Brand Management Jean, Noel, Kapferer Kogan Page India, Latest Edition
3. Brand Building and Advertising Concepts and Cases, M B ParameswaranTata McGraw Hill
Publication Latest Edition.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC.yumfNimPsGS9u7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9
zAzEEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660160558/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2finfolear
ners.com%2febooks%2fstrategic-brand-management-keller-4th-edition-pdf-free-
download%2f/RK=2/RS=U5OgBIEUZ62VbrTFMU6vraNPfSU-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC.yumfNimPsGTdu7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9
zAzIEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660160558/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2finfolearn
ers.com%2febooks%2fstrategic-brand-management-kevin-lane-keller-
pdf%2f/RK=2/RS=sD1VpREzcn0kxS0pjjXk6qwLD8Y-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC.yumfNimPsGVdu7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9
zAzMEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660160558/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fsites.go
ogle.com%2fsite%2fonlineamazonbookdownload%2f-pdf-download-strategic-brand-
management-pdf-by-kevin-lane-keller/RK=2/RS=z1m_wwr1.oNfn.v1DhFqibGa90E-

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Go to a supermarket and find the brand elements in various brands of soaps, mobiles, jeans,
and other product.
 If you would start an MBA College, what would the positioning be with POP’s and POD’s?
 Pick up your college, analyse its positioning and how would you reposition it?
 Pick a multiproduct company and as completely as possible analyze its brand portfolio and
brand extensions?
 Consider some groups like Tata’s , Birla’s, Infosys etc – what is their branding strategy.
 Students are supposed to assess the product life cycle and appraise alternative approaches to
luxury brand management.
 Students can select any two popular brands and identify and examine the criteria for success in
the luxury brand industry.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. No. Description Blooms Level
CO1 Comprehend & correlate all the management functions to brand L1/L2
creation
CO2 Ability to develop the branding strategies L3
CO3 Demonstrate their acumen in applying managerial and behavioural L4
concepts in creating brand equity
CO4 Ability to analyse the global brands and their SWOT. L4
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS

Course Code 22MBAMM404 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To build a comprehensive framework for integrated marketing communications.
 To the study the advertising, publicity, personal selling, direct marketing and sales promotion.
 To enhance knowledge of emerging trends in integrated marketing communications.
 To acquaint the students with the latest internet and e-marketing techniques, ethically way of
handling business.

Module-1 (6 Hours)
Integrated Marketing Communication: Role of IMC in marketing process, IMC planning model,
Marketing and promotion Process model.
Communication Process, steps involved in developing IMC programme, Effectiveness of marketing
communications
Advertising: Purpose, Role, Functions, Types, Advertising Vs Marketing mix, Advertising appeal in
various stages of PLC
Relevant Case Study

Module-2 (6 Hours)
Advertising Agency: Type of agencies, Services offered by various agencies, Criteria For selecting
the agencies and evaluation.
Advertising objectives and Budgeting: Goal setting – DAGMAR approach, various budgeting
methods used.
Relevant Case Study
Module-3 (7 Hours)
Media planning: Factors considered in Media Planning, Developing Media plan, Importance,
Problems encountered, Advertising Media, Media Evaluation-Print, Broadcast media, Support media
in advertising.
Media strategy: Creativity, Elements of creative strategies and its implementation, Importance of
Headline and body copy.
Relevant Case Study

Module-4 (7 Hours)
Direct Marketing: Features, Functions, Growth, Advantages/Disadvantages, And Direct Marketing
Strategies.
Promotion: Meaning, Importance, tools used, Conventional/unconventional, drawbacks, push pull
strategies, Co-operative advertising, Integration with advertising and publicity
Public relation/ Publicity:-Meaning, Objectives, tools of public relations, Public Relation strategies,
Goals of publicity
Corporate Advertising – Role, Types, Limitations, PR Vs Publicity
Relevant Case Study
01.02.2023

Module-5 (7 Hours)
Monitoring, Evaluation and control: Measurement in advertising, various methods used for
evaluation, Pre-testing, Post testing.
Relevant Case Study

Module-6 (7 Hours)
International Advertising: Global environment in advertising, Decision areas in international
advertising.
Industrial advertising: B 2 B Communication, Special issues in Industrial selling.
Internet advertising: Meaning, Components, Advantages and Limitations, Types of Internet
advertising
Advertising Laws & Ethics: Adverting & Law, Advertising & Ethics, Pester Power, Intellectual
Property Rights, ASCI
Relevant Case Study
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

1. Advertising and Promotions IMC Perspectives: Belch and Belch, 9/e, Tata McGraw Hill,2012.
2. Advertising & Integrated Brand Promotion - O’Guinn, Allen, Semenik, Cenage Learning,
2008
3. Integrated Advertising, Promotion, and Marketing Communications, Global Edition, Kenneth
E Clow, Donald E Baack, 9th edition Published by Pearson, Copyright © 2022
4. Advertising an IMC Perspective, S.N. Murthy & U Bhojanna, Excel Books, 2007
5. Integrated Marketing Communications – Niraj Kumar, HPH, 2013.
6. Advertising Management, Jaishri Jethwaney & Shruti Jain, Oxford UniversityPress
7. Advertising & Promotions: An IMC perspective, Kruti Shah and Alan, Souza, Tata Mc Graw
Hill
8. Advertising & Promotion:An IMC approach, TerenceA. ShimpPub., Cengage Learning

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

Weblinks for Video lectures:

1. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110107158/L04.html
2. https://www.academia.edu/13180608/E_Book_IMC_Integrated_Marketing_Communication
3. https://www.pdfdrive.com/integrated-marketing-communications-d41011351.html
4. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110107158/L03.html
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GyxdlocMSpY
6. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dQNRWF1BaTc
7. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=joyTZl5isp4
8. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iGZZqpytetE
9. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-WXxxR-Ry3E
10. http://www.gurukpo.com
11. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uuFGD7eCrhc

Weblinks for Additional e-Resources:

1. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/46966230_Advertising_and_Promotion_An_Integrat
ed_Marketing_Communication_Perspective
2. https://bestdigitalagency.in/best-advertising-agencies-in-bangalore/
3. https://www.marketingevolution.com/marketing-essentials/media-planning
4. https://www.marketing91.com/media-strategy/
5. https://www.cyberclick.net/numericalblogen/what-is-direct-marketing-benefits-and-steps-to-
campaign
6. https://www.startingbusiness.com/blog/marketing-ethics
7. https://www.igi-global.com/chapter/integrated-marketing-communication-and-the-ethics-of-
advertising/213085
8. https://byjus.com/commerce/what-is-promotion/
9. https://www.managementstudyhq.com/public-relations-and-publicity.html
10. https://ebooks.ibsindia.org/imc/chapter/sessions-24-25-monitoring-evaluation-control-
integrated-marketing-communication/
11. https://www.artofmarketing.org/international-marketing-2/advertising/international-
advertising-meaning-characteristics-nature-and-media-selection/13601
12. https://sendpulse.com/support/glossary/advertising
13. https://www.managementstudyguide.com/industrial-advertising.htm

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Define and apply knowledge of various aspects of managerial decision making related to
marketing communications strategy and tactics.
 Ability to create an integrated marketing communications plan which includes promotional
strategies.
 Explain the role of IMC in the overall marketing &Use effectiveness measures to evaluate
IMC strategies.
 Prepare advertising copy and design other basic IMC tools.
 Develop Internet media strategies to solve business problems.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 The students will be able to define and apply knowledge of various aspects L1
of managerial decision making related to marketing communications
strategy and tactics.
CO2 The students will be getting an idea to explain the role of IMC in the L2
overall marketing &Use effectiveness measures to evaluate IMC strategies.
CO3 The students will get the aability to create an integrated marketing L3
communications plan which includes promotional strategies.
CO4 The students will get trained in the art of drafting, prepare advertising copy L4
and design other basic IMC tools ethically
Situations.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2
CO2 1 2
CO3 1 2 3
CO4 1 2 3 2
01.02.2023

DIGITAL AND SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING

Course Code 22MBAMM405 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning Objectives:
This course will enable the students
 Understand how and why to use digital marketing for multiple goals within a larger marketing
and/or media strategy.
 Understand the major digital marketing channels - online advertising: Digital display, video,
mobile, search engine, and social media.
 Learn to develop, evaluate, and execute a comprehensive digital marketing strategy and plan.
 Learn how to measure digital marketing efforts and calculate ROI.
 Explore the latest digital ad technologies.
Module-1 (5 Hours)
Digital Marketing Overview: Concept of Digital Marketing, Traditional Vs Digital Marketing,
Understanding Digital Marketing Process, Digital Landscape. Digital advertising Market in India.
Skills required in Digital Marketing, Digital Marketing Planning and Strategy.
Module-2 (6 Hours)
Display Advertising: Concept of Display Advertising, types of display ads, buying models, display
plan, Segmenting and customizing Messages, Targeting- contextual targeting placement targeting,
remarketing, interest categories, geographic and language tagging. Programmatic digital advertising,
You Tube Advertising. The P-O-E-M Framework.
Module-3 (7 Hours)
Digital Advertising (PPC, Digital Display and YouTube campaign): Google Ad Words Overview;
Understanding AdWords Algorithm; Creating Search Campaigns; Understanding Ad Placement,
Understanding Ad Ranks, Types of Search Campaigns - Standard, All features, dynamic search &
product listing. Tracking
Performance/Conversion: conversion tracking and its importance, setting up of conversion tracking,
Optimizing Search Ad Campaigns. Display ads and its features, Types of display campaigns, Creating
Display Campaign, Optimizing Display Campaign and Re-marketing, customer engagement on e-
portals.
Concept of Online Advertising: Types of Online Advertising, Contextual advertising, Payment
Modules, Different Online advertising platforms Creating Banner Ads Using Tools

Module-4 (8 Hours)
01.02.2023

Emerging trends in Digital Marketing: Affiliate Marketing- Affiliate marketing history, Affiliate
marketing scenario in India, Different ways to do affiliate marketing.
Email Marketing- email marketing and process. Types of email marketing- Opt-in & bulk emailing;
Setting up email marketing account, creating a broadcast email. auto responders, Setting up auto
responders; Tricks to land in inbox instead of spam folder;
Social Media Marketing-Concept of social media marketing, Understanding Facebook marketing,
LinkedIn Marketing, Twitter Marketing, Video Marketing and VIDEO & AUDIO (PODCASTING)
marketing; and
Content Marketing-Introduction to content marketing, Objective of content marketing, Content
marketing 7 step strategy building process, writing a great compelling content, optimizing content for
search engines, opt-in email list with content marketing examples.

Module-5 (7 Hours)
Search Engine Optimization (SEO): Introduction to SEO. Search engine Major functions and
operating algorithm, Introduction to SERP, search engine keywords and types, Google keyword
planner tool; Keywords research process; Understanding keywords; On page optimization; Off Page
optimization; Top tools for SEO; Monitoring SEO process; Preparing SEO reports, creating SEO
Strategy, link juice, Importance of domain and page authority, Optimize exact keywords for impactful
search. Google Panda Algorithm, Google Penguin and Google EMD Update. How to save your site
from Google Panda, Penguin and EMD Update, how to recover your site from Panda, Penguin and
EMD.

Module-6 (7 Hours)
E-Commerce and Payment Gateway: Concept of e-commerce, Top ecommerce websites around the
world, software Payment Gateways, Merchant Accounts & Logistics for physical goods. Integrating
Woo-commerce and setting up an ecommerce store on Word Press. Case studies on ecommerce
websites. Google Product Listing Ads (PLA) for ecommerce websites. Practical Process of SEO for
an ecommerce website.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Marketing 4.0: Moving from Traditional to Digital by P. Kotler. Wiley Publication.
2. The Essentials of E-Marketing, 4th edition by Quirk Education (E-Book)
3. Understanding Digital Marketing: Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital Generation, by
Damian Ryan and Calvin Jones. Kogan Page Publication, 3rd edition.
4. Digital Marketing Insights 2017, Social Beat Digital Marketing LLP, Kindle Edition.
5. Social Media for Business – Stories of Indian Brands, By Sorav Jain
6. Total E-mail Marketing: Maximizing your results from Integrated E-marketing (E-marketing
essentials): Dave Chaffey.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mg104/preview
 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_mg78/preview
 https://learninglink.oup.com/access/king-lawley3e-student-resources#tag_all-chapters
 https://openstax.org/details/books/organizational-behavior
 https://www.classcentral.com/course/introduction-organisational-behaviour-11892

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Create an Ad Campaign using banner to launch ad in YOU TUBE
 Create a digital Marketing Plan
 Students are suggested to create a digital marketing plan.
 Students are suggested to create a mobile advertising for any organisation/Product
 Students can create an Ad Campaign using banner to launch ad in YOU TUBE.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to:
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Illustrate the knowledge about digital marketing strategy and planning. L2
CO2 Describe and/or improve a strategy for measuring and improving digital L4
media effectiveness
CO3 Describe online advertising including ad networks and behavioural L4
targeting.
CO4 Evaluate Emerging trends in digital marketing. L4
CO5 Analyze how to create search engine optimization strategy for own L5
business.
Mapping of COs and POs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 1 2 2 1
CO5
01.02.2023

BUSINESS MARKETING
Course Code 22MBAMM406 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning Objectives:
This course will enable the students
 To understand how and why to use digital marketing for multiple goals within a larger
marketing and/or media strategy.
 To understand the major digital marketing channels - online advertising: Digital display, video,
mobile, search engine, and social media.
 To develop, evaluate, and execute a comprehensive digital marketing strategy and plan.
 To measure digital marketing efforts and calculate ROI.
 To explore the latest digital ad technologies.
Module-1 (5 Hours)
B2B Marketing: B2B-Introduction, significance and concept of B2B Marketing. Business Markets, characteristics.
Classification of Business Products and Markets.

Module-2 (8 Hours)
Organisational Buying Behaviour: Factors affecting purchasing decisions, purchasing orientation,
Segmenting purchase categories. Purchase Process-variations. Buying situations and marketer actions.
Online buying. Traditional marketing approach-uncertainties of buyer and supplier/marketer. Supplier
uncertainties. Relationship variables. Impact of IT. Inter-firm Relationships and Networks.
Research on B2B markets: Marketing Information System; Research facilities; Analysis of
competition - Benchmarking. Case Study.
Module-3 (8 Hours)
B2B strategy and Market Segmentation:
Process, approach. Responsible strategy-CSR and sustainability, Customer value and strategy.
Researching B2B markets. Standard industrial classification.
B2B Market Segmentation- Significance of segmentation. Basis of segmentation. Challenges of
segmentation in B2B markets. B2B positioning. Case Study.
Module-4 (7 Hours)
Market Communication: Brand expression, Communication mix and customer acquisition process.
Relationship Communication, sales responsibilities. The relationship communication process, call
preparation, selling to low-priority and high priority customers. Value selling and consequences-
order fulfillment-relationship building. Vertical specialization: Choosing industry; specialization;
Expanding to other verticals in the industry. Case Study.
Module-5 (5 Hours)
Relationship Portfolio & Key Account Management:
Principles of Portfolio management, identifying key accounts, Classification criteria. Relationship life-cycle,
declassification, managing loyalty. Case Study. Assignment: Implementing Key Account Management.
01.02.2023

Module-6 (7 Hours)

B2B product Offerings and Price Setting: Elements of B2B offering, strategic tools for managing
product offerings, managing innovation in the B2B context. Price setting in B2B markets- 3 C’s of
pricing-cost, customer and competition-Pricing- strategy, price positioning, role of sales force in
pricing, bid pricing, internet auctions, ethical aspects of B2B pricing. Product Policy of established
products: Classification of the product types; The life cycle of the product; Management products;
Strategies for established products. Pricing: Price on the Internet; Financial marketing.
Case Study
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
Suggested Learning Resources:
Books
 Business to Business Marketing, Ross Brennan, Louise Canning & Raymond McDowell Sage Publications , 3e -
2014.
 B2B Marketing Strategy: Differentiate, Develop and Deliver Lasting Customer Engagement, Heidi Taylor Kogan
Page, 1/e, 2017.
 Innovative B2B Marketing: New Models, Processes and Theory, Simon Hall, Kogan Page, 1/e, 2017
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKDaS_rvNiJ.UIUwi7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9z
AzEEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660165952/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fcollegele
arners.com%2fbooks%2fb2b-marketing-pdf-free-
download%2f/RK=2/RS=BcuoM9EM5UHUTDADPHqdt_amyLY-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKDaS_rvNiJ.UIVQi7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9z
AzIEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660165952/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fbibleandb
ookcenter.com%2fread%2fb2b-
marketing%2f/RK=2/RS=Q6Tqbed4LYKcVncCHVw3.picYIM-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKDaS_rvNiJ.UIVwi7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9z
AzMEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660165952/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fptgmedi
a.pearsoncmg.com%2fimages%2f9780134084527%2fsamplepages%2f9780134084633.pdf/R
K=2/RS=ehk_ISgVQTUwnP1D8v6ujXo05MY-

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Interview a salesperson and write a brief report about what they like and dislike about their
jobs, their salary, travelling allowances, sales quotas, why chose sales career, and what does it
take to succeed in this profession.
 Ask your friends if they would buy certain goods like groceries, vegetables, socks, mobile,
pens etc from the roadside vendor as against a regular shop. Group the products into low risk
and high risk ones. Does this buying behaviour also depend on the personality of the
individual doing the buying? Or the one doing the selling?
 Students can make a presentation on any product or the services of student choice, covering
selling strategies and one day work exposure towards merchandising in any big retail outlets
of respective places where the institute if operating.
 Rural colleges can send the students to the city nearby to observe the merchandising planning
in retail outlets and to make a small report.
 Roles and functions of sales manager and sales people are different in every organization
Sales people view the roles of sales managers in their own way and vice versa. You are the
sales manager of a company. You make an analysis of what you feel should be roles of a sales
manager and a salesperson for maximizing sales of the organization.
 Your company is active in internet trading. A current issue in internet trading is: how to make
internet selling safe. Different methods have been suggested for safety or security of internet
trading. You have to analyze different methods and recommend a method for your company.
01.02.2023

Course outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Understand significance of B2B marketing. L2
Ability to create an integrated marketing communications plan which
CO2 L2
includes promotional strategies.
CO3 Effectively use marketing communication for customer acquisition. L4
Define and apply knowledge of various aspects of managerial decision
CO4 L5
making related to marketing communications strategy and tactics.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

4th Semester MBA Finance Electives

Global Financial Management

Course Code 22MBAFM403 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning Objectives:
 To understand the International Financial Environment and the Foreign Exchange market.
 To learn hedging and Forex risk management.
 To learn the Firm’s Exposure to risk in International environment and various theories associated
with it.
 Understand the various stages of expansion overseas that multinational corporations utilize in
order to benefit from globalization.
 Describe the international monetary system and the foreign exchange markets.
 Examine the Balance of Payments (BOP) data and determine its implications for international
competition.
 Identify the basic philosophies that govern corporate behaviour throughout the world.
 Forecast exchange rates based on the parity conditions that should apply between spot rates,
forward rates, inflation rates, and interest rates.
 Evaluate portfolios and apply the capital asset pricing model and other multifactor Models in
financial decision making.
 Apply the relevant models and skills in Prediction of corporate failure
 Apply derivatives in financial risk management and apply international finance concepts.
 Evaluate mergers and acquisitions
 Undertake corporate restructuring and re-organisation& apply valuation techniques in real estate
finance

Module-1 (6 Hours)
International Financial Environment: An overview of IFM- Importance, rewards & risk of
international finance- Goals of MNC- Balance of Payments (BoP)- Fundamentals of BoP-Accounting
components of BOP- Equilibrium & Disequilibrium. International Monetary System: Evolution-Gold
Standard- Bretton Woods system- flexible exchange rate regime- recent developments in exchange
rate arrangements-recent changes and challenges in IFM- the Economic and Monetary Union
(EMU).(Only Theory).
Module-2 (8 Hours)
01.02.2023

Foreign Exchange Market: Characteristics, Functions and Structure of Forex markets-Foreign

exchange market participants- Types of transactions and Settlements Dates-Exchange rate quotations-
Determination of Exchange rates in Spot markets- Exchange rates determinations in Forward
markets- Exchange rate behaviour-Cross Rates, Bid, Ask, Spread. Overview of international money
markets (Theory & Problems).
Module-3 (8 Hours)
Foreign Exchange Risk Management: Foreign exchange risk and its types(transaction risk,
translation risk & economic risk) - Hedging against foreign exchange exposure – Forward Market-
Forward contract Vs Future contracts- Futures Market- Options Market(call option, put option,
American option, European option & Asian option)- Currency Swaps-Interest Rate Swap- problems
on both two-way and three-way swaps. Overview of international stock market (Theory & Problems).
Module-4 (6 Hours)
International Financial Markets and Instruments: Foreign Portfolio Investment- International
Bond & Equity market-Global Depositary Receipt (GDR)- American Depository Receipt (ADR)-
International Financial Instruments: Foreign Bonds & Eurobonds, Global Bonds. Floating rate Notes-
Zero coupon Bonds- International Money Markets. International Banking services –Correspondent
Bank-Representative offices- Foreign Branches. Forward Rate Agreements. (Only Theory).
Module-5 (6 Hours)
Forecasting Foreign Exchange rate: International Parity Relationships- Measuring exchange rate
movements-Exchange rate equilibrium –Factors effecting foreign exchange rate- Forecasting foreign
exchange rates. Interest Rate Parity (IRP), Purchasing Power Parity Theory (PPP) & International
Fisher Effects (IFE) - Comparison of IRP, PPP and IFE. Arbitrage-Types of Arbitrage – locational,
triangular and covered interest arbitrage. (Theory & Problems).

Module-6 (6 Hours)
Foreign Exchange exposure: Management of Transaction exposure, Translation exposure,
Economic exposure, Political Exposure- Management of Interest rate exposure.
International Capital Budgeting: Concept- Factors affecting international capital budgeting-
International budgeting partnership- Inputs for international capital budgeting- Evaluation of a project
for international capital budgeting (Theory & Problems).
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 40 Percent theory and 60 percent problems.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. International Corporate Finance, Jeff Madura, Cengage Learning, 10/e, 2012.
2. International Financial Management, Cheol Eun & Bruce Resnick, McGraw Hill, 7/e, 2014
3. International Financial Management, Binoy Mathew & G. Nagarajan, Jayvee Digital
Publishing, 2/e, 2022.
4. Financing International Trade: Banking Theories and Applications, Gargi Sanati, Sage
Publication, 1/e, 2017.
5. International Financial Management, Apte P.G & Sanjeevan Kapshe, McGraw Hill, 8/e, 2020.
6. Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, Moffett, M. H., Stonehill, A. I., & Eiteman, D. K.
Global Edition: Vol. Fifth edition, Global edition. Pearson, (2016).
7. International Financial Management, Jeff Madura, & Roland Fox. Edition 5. Cengage
Learning. (2020).
Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Og-EOTRz7XA
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jr1t1lzsx-A
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BLTz_y7obGw
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eciQ3sTftBs
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rE0JVR0Nm1I
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110105057/L01.html
 https://www.ravisonkhiyaclasses.com/product/ca-inter-financial-management-video-lectures-
by-ca-ravi-sonkhiya-download-with-hard-copy-books/
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/international-finance-books.html
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/the-handbook-of-international-trade-and-finance-the-complete-
guide-to-risk-management-international-payments-and-currency-management-bonds-and-
guarantees-credit-insurance-and-trade-finance-e184245062.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KvRBST1o0RE

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Understand international capital and foreign exchange market
 Explore the international integration of financial markets and analyse implications for financial
managers.
 Identify derivative instruments and strategies used by multinational corporations to hedge
financial risks.
 Apply critical thinking skills in identifying and evaluating international financial issues and
information.
 Use analytical skills to identify and analyse material factors that are involved in business
problems.
 Identify risk relating to exchange rate fluctuations and develop strategies to deal with them
 Identify and evaluate foreign direct investment and international acquisition opportunities
 Develop strategies to deal with other types of country risks associated with foreign operations
 Express well considered opinion on issues relating to international financial management.
 Visit the foreign exchange department of a bank, study the operations and submit a report
 Track and analyse the rupee exchange value against Dollar and Euro in spot and forward markets
for one week and record the observations.
 Study the different types of swaps used in Foreign Exchange Market
 Visit the foreign exchange department of a bank, study the operations and submit a report
 Track and analyse the rupee exchange value against Dollar and Euro in spot and forward markets
for one week and record the observations

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms

No. Level
CO1 The student will have an understanding of the International Financial L1
Environment.
CO2 The student will learn about the foreign exchange market, participants and L2, L3
transactions.
CO3 The student will be able to use derivatives in foreign exchange risk L2
management.
CO4 The student will be able to evaluate the Firm’s Exposure to risk in L4
International environment and various theories associated with it.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

MERGERS ACQUISTIONS AND CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

Course Code 22MBAFM404 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To impart knowledge on theories and rationale of corporate restructuring.
 To explain and critically evaluate M & A with its different classifications, strategies, theories,
synergy etc.
 To evaluate the financial forms of M & A.
 To understand the HR & legal aspects of M & A.
 To use appropriate defensive strategies against hostile takeovers.

Module-1 (6 hours)
Corporate Restructuring Meaning, significance and forms of restructuring–sell-off, spin-off,
divestitures, demerger, Equity Carve Out (ECO), Leveraged Buy Outs (LBO), Management Buy Out
(MBO), Master Limited Partnership (MLP), Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) and joint ventures.
(Theory). Introduction to cross-borders mergers and acquisitions.
Module-2 (6 hours)
Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A): Introduction of M & A, Meaning-types of mergers–Merger
Motives-Theories of Mergers-Mergers and industry life cycle, Reasons for failures of M & A-
synergy-types of synergy–value creation in M&A (Theory).
Module-3 (6 hours)
Merger Process: Procedure for effecting M & A-Five-stage model–Due diligence–Types, process
and challenges of due diligence-HR aspects of M & A–Tips for successful mergers-Process of
merger integration (Theory).
Module-4 (8 hours)
Financial Evaluation of M & A Merger as a capital budgeting-Business valuation approaches-asset
based, market based and income based approaches-Exchange Ratio (Swap Ratio)-Methods of
determining exchange rate. (Theory and Problems).
Module-5 (8 hours)
Accounting aspects of Amalgamation: Types of amalgamations (Amalgamation in the nature of
merger and amalgamation in the nature of purchase)-Methods of Accounting-Pooling of interest
method and Purchase method)–Calculation of purchase consideration-Journal entries in the books of
transferor & transferee company-Ledger accounts in the books of transferor and transferee
companies. (Theory and Problems).
Module-6 (6 hours)
Acquisitions/Takeovers & Post acquisition integration: Meaning and types of
acquisition/takeovers (Friendly and Hostile takeovers)-Anti-takeover strategies-Anti-takeover
amendments-Legal and human framework of M & A-Combination and Competition Act-2002,
Competition Commission of India (CCI)-The SEBI Substantial Acquisition of Shares and Takeover
(Takeover code-2011). Post acquisition integration: Organization and human aspect of post
01.02.2023

acquisition –Stages in the integration process (Theory).

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 50 percent theory and 50 percent problems.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Mergers Acquisitions & Corporate Restructuring - Strategies & Practices, Rabi Narayan Kar
and Minakshi, Taxmann’s, 3/e, 2017.
2. Mergers and Acquisitions, Sheeba Kapil and Kanwal N. Kapil, Wiley, 2/e, 2017.
3. Mergers, Acquisitions and Corporate Restructuring: Text and Cases, Chandrashekar,
Krishnamurti & Vishwanath S, Sage Publications, 2/e, 2018.
4. Mergers, Acquisitions and Takeovers, H.R.Machiraju, New Age International Publishers, 1/e,
2010.
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.mca.gov.in/MinistryV2/mergers+and+acquisitions.html
 https://imaa-institute.org/e-library-m-and-a/
 https://www2.deloitte.com/content/dam/Deloitte/us/Documents/mergers-acqisitions/us-ma-
making-the-deal-work-strategy.pdf
 https://corporatefinanceinstitute.com/resources/knowledge/deals/motives-for-mergers/

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due
regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Case studies assigned to group of students to analyse the process of recent mergers of various
sectors.
 Evaluate the financial performance of Company’s pre and post merger deal using financial
tools/ ratios.
 Students need to choose any two latest M & A deal, announced/completed in the Indian
corporate sector and Compile complete details of the deal. Study the deal in the light of the
following:
1. Nature of the deal: merger, amalgamation, acquisition, takeover, OR any program of corporate
restructuring Valuation/Financials involved in the deal.
2. Synergies/benefits likely to emerge from the deal.
3. Challenges/Impact/Problems-associated with the deal.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. No. Description Blooms
Level
CO1 To explain the major forms and objectives of corporate restructuring. L5
CO2 To describe the process of value creation under different forms of M & A L6
CO3 To Understand M&A with its different classifications, strategies, theories, L1
synergy etc.
CO4 To Conduct financial evaluation of M&A L5
CO5 To Analyze and demonstrate the accounting aspects of Amalgamation L4
CO6 To Critically evaluate different types of M&A, takeover and anti takeover L5
strategies
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 2 2
CO2 1 2 2
CO3 1 1
CO4 1 3 1 3
CO5 2 1 2
CO6 1 3 1 2 1
01.02.2023

RISK MANAGEMENT AND INSURANCE

Course Code 22MBAFM405 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To provide an understanding of different types of risk.
 To provide an understanding of the risk identification and measurement.
 To give an overview of role of Life Insurance in risk management.
 To provide an understanding of general insurance contract.
Module-1 (6 hours)
Introduction to Risk Management: Risk Identification: Risk-Risk and Uncertainty-Types of Risk-
Burden of Risk-Sources of Risk-Methods of handling Risk-Degree of Risk-Management of Risk.
Risk Identification-Business Risk Exposures-Individual Exposures-Exposures of Physical Assets -
Exposures of Financial Assets -Exposures of Human Assets - Exposures to Legal Liability - Exposure
to Work-Related Injury. (Theory).

Module-2 (6 hours)
Risk Measurement: Evaluating the Frequency and Severity of Losses-Risk Control-Risk Financing
Techniques-Risk Management Decision Methods-Pooling Arrangements and Diversification of Risk.
Advanced Issues in Risk Management: The Changing Scope of Risk Management-Insurance Market
Dynamics-Loss Forecasting-Financial Analysis in Risk Management -- Decision Making Other Risk
Management Tools. (Theory).
Module-3 (6 hours)
Introduction to Insurance: Risk and Insurance- Definition and Basic Characteristics of Insurance-
Requirements of an Insurable Risk-Adverse Selection and Insurance-Insurance vs. Gambling
Insurance vs. Hedging Types of Insurance-Essentials of Insurance Contracts. Indian Insurance
Industry -Historical Framework of Insurance, Insurance sector Reforms in India. IRDA-Duties and
powers of IRDA-IRDA Act 1999. (Theory).

Module-4 (8 hours)
Life Insurance: Basics of Life Insurance-Growth of Actuarial Science-Features of Life Insurance-Life
Insurance Contract-Life Insurance Documents-Insurance Premium Calculations. Life Insurance
Classification-Classification on the Basis –Duration-Premium Payment Participation in Profit-
Number of Persons Assured-Payment of Policy Amount-Money Back Policies-Module Linked Plans.
Annuities-Need of Annuity Contracts, Annuity V/s Life Insurance, Classification of Annuities.
(Theory).

Module-5 (8 hours)
General Insurance:
Laws Related to General Insurance-General Insurance Contract-General Insurance Corporation
(GIC). Health Insurance-Individual Medical Expense Insurance – Long Term Care Coverage –
Disability Income Insurance – Medi-claim Policy – Group Medi-claim Policy – Personal Accident
Policy – Child Welfare Policy-Employee Group Insurance – Features of Group Health Insurance –
01.02.2023

Group Availability Plan. Fire Insurance-Essentials of Fire Insurance Contracts, Types of Fire
Insurance Policies, Fire Insurance Coverage. Marine Insurance-Types of Marine Insurance – Marine
Insurance principles Important Clauses in Marine Insurance– Marine Insurance Policies –Marine
Risks-Clauses in Marine Policy. Motor Vehicles Insurance-Need for Motor Insurance, Types of
Motor Insurance, Factors to be considered for Premium Fixing. (Theory).
Module-6 (6 hours)
Management of Insurance Companies:
Functions and Organization of Insurers- Types of Insurance Organization, Organizational Structure of
Insurance Companies-Functions of Insurers. Underwriting-Principles of Underwriting, Underwriting
in Life Insurance, Underwriting in nonlife Insurance. Claims Management-Claim Settlement in
General Insurance-Claim Settlement in Life Insurance. (Theory).
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 100 percent theory in SEE.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. Principles of Risk Management and Insurance, George E Rejda, Pearson, 12/e, 2009.
2. Insurance and Risk Management, P.K. Gupta, Himalaya, 1/e, 2010
3. Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, Dorfman, Mark S., Prentice Hall India, 10/e,
2008.
4. Risk Management and Insurance, Scott E. Harrington, Gregory R Niehaus, TMH, 2/e, 2007.
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://vulms.vu.edu.pk/Courses/FIN725/Downloads/Risk%20management%20and%20insur
ance.pdf
 http://www.insurance-institute.ru/library/zothers/mcnamara.pdf
 https://www.coursera.org/lecture/family-planning/introduction-to-risk-management-sxEMr
 https://cob.unt.edu/firel/rmi
 https://slideplayer.com/slide/4760242/

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Should visit insurance companies and understand the types of policies
 Understand how insurance premium are fixed
 Interact with insurance agents and understand the ground reality of insurance investors.
 Understand how different insurance companies settles the accident claims/death claims
 Understand the functioning and organisation structure of insurances companies.
 Compile and analyse General and Life insurance policies offered by Indian insurance
companies (one public sector and one private sector)
 Visit policy bazaar portal and study the different types of insurance policies offered by the
Indian insurance companies.
 Analyse the Systematic and unsystematic risk of any two companies
 Analyse the types of Risk in different sectors of India due to Covid- 19 Pandemic

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Blooms
Sl. No. Description
Level
CO1 Understand various types of risks. L2
CO2 Assess the process of identifying and measuring the risk. L6
CO3 Acquaint with the functioning of life Insurance in risk management. L1
CO4 Understand general insurance contract. L2
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 2 2
CO2 1 2 2
CO3 1 1
CO4 1 3 1 3
01.02.2023

INDIRECT TAXATION
Course Code 22MBAFM406 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To acquaint the students with basic principles and broad understanding of the Indian Indirect
tax laws.
 To enable students to distinguish the difference in concept of forward & reverse charge
mechanism, composite & mixed supply and various exemptions under the GST regime.
 To enhance the knowledge of students on provisions related to time, place and value of
supply.
 To enable the student to understand the process of Registration, input tax credit (ITC) and
GST assessment under the GST law.
 To enable the student to understand Customs duty provisions and evaluates import and export
goods.
Module-1 (6 hours)
Introduction to Goods and Services Tax (GST): Basic concepts of GST, Features, Taxes
subsumed and not subsumed in GST, Need for GST in India, Benefits and drawbacks of GST, Dual
GST Model-significance, Rates of GST, Structure of GST-CGST Act 2017, SGST Act 2017,
UTGST Act 2017 & IGST Act 2017, GST Council-Structure, Recommendations and functions,
Goods and Services Tax Network (GSTN)-Features, functions and services, Goods and services
exempted from GST (Theory)
Module-2 (6 hours)
Registration and Filing of returns:
GST Registration-Meaning, Benefits, Types of Registration & Provisions: Persons liable and not
liable for Registration, Compulsory Registration, Voluntary Registration, Deemed Registration, Suo
Motu Registration, Procedure for Registration, GSTIN (Theory), Computation of aggregate turnover
(Simple problems).
Returns under GST-Benefits, features, Modes of filing returns, Furnishing of Returns, First Return,
Annual return and Final return (Theory). Returns under GST-Benefits, features, Modes of filing
returns, Furnishing of Returns, First Return, Annual return and Final return (Theory).
Module-3 (8 hours)
Supply, Levy and Collection of Tax:
Supply-Meaning of Goods and Services, Deemed supply, Classification of supply-Inward & outward
supply, One time & Continuous supply, supply on the basis of taxability & geographical location,
Composite and Mixed Supplies, Scope of supply (Theory) Determination of tax liability on various
types of supply (Simple problems)
01.02.2023

Levy and Collection, Composition scheme in GST- Eligibility criteria, Conditions for adoption,
Rate of GST of the Composition Levy, (Simple problems on calculation of value of taxable supply
and GST Levy). (Theory and Problems).
Module-4 (8 hours)
Time, Place and Value of Supply
Time of Supply-Key concepts, Determination of time of supply of goods and services (Simple
problems including Change in Rate of Tax in respect of Supply of Goods or Services),
Place of Supply – importance and types. Simple Problems on identification of Place of supply.
Value of Supply. (Simple problems on treatment of discount in transaction value, Money exchange
services, Air travel agent, based on Cost. Value of supply in case of lottery, betting, gambling and
Horse racing)
Input tax credit-Meaning, Eligibility for availing ITC, Conditions to be satisfied for availing ITC.
Determination of ITC admissible on goods and services (Simple problems)
Module-5 (4 hours)
Export-Import Procedure for Customs
Customs Act-important definitions, Types of goods, import Export Route, Types of Cess under
Customs, Introduction to Baggage and General Free Allowance. Provisional Assessment of Duty,
Due Dates for Payment of Duty, Penalties under Customs, Seizure of Goods, Confiscation of Goods.
(Theory).
Module-6 (8 hours)
Valuation of Customs Duty: Concept, Meaning of Customs Duty, Circumstances of Levy of
Customs Duties and Types of Duties and Exemption from Customs Duty. Valuation under customs:
Valuation of Imported Goods and Valuation of Export Goods.. (Problems on Valuation of Imported
Goods- calculation of FOB, CIF, AV, BCD, SWS, GST Concession Cess, and IGST) (Theory and
Problems)
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full question from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 50 percent theory and 50 percent problems in SEE.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. GST & Customs Law (University Edition), K.M Bansal, Taxmann’s, Latest Edition.
2. Indirect Taxes Law and practices, V S Datey, Taxmann’s, Latest Edition.
3. Goods & Services Tax (GST) in India, B. Viswanathan, UBS Publishers, Latest Edition.
4. Indirect Taxation, Raj K Agrawal & Shivangi Agrawal, Bharat Law House Pvt. Ltd, Latest
Edition.
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

1. GST Council: www.gstindia.com/tag/gst-council/
2. CBEC : http://www.cbec.gov.in/htdocs-cbec/gst
3. GST Act/Rules/Migration/Press Release etc: http://www.cbec.gov.in/htdocs-cbec/gst/index
4. GST Awareness campaign/training calendar: https://gstawareness.cbec.gov.in/
5. GST FAQ: http://www.cbec.gov.in/resources//htdocs-cbec/deptt_offcr/faq-on-gst.pdf
6. GSTN: http://www.gstn.org/
7. FAQ on GST Suvidha Providers GSTN : http://www.gstn.org/ecosystem/faq_question.php

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Visit to a small scale trader and identify documents pertaining to Registration as well as
Returns under GST under Composition Scheme.
 Visit to a GST practitioner to learn Online GST Returns
 Generate GSTR -1 & GSTR- 3B, E way Bill
 Calculate the GST and avail ITC for a local trader.
 List the provisions incorporated under GST law in the last Union Budget and prepare a note on
these changes.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. No. Description Blooms
Level
CO1 Explain the various terms related to Indian Goods and Service tax (GST) L5
CO2 Analyze whether a person is eligible to obtain registration as well as filing of L4
returns under GST law.
CO3 Have clarity on Provisions of levy and collection of GST in India L3
CO4 Assess the Value of goods and services based on provisions of Time, value L5
and Place of supply.
CO5 Understand the concept of import and export procedure for Custom duty. L2

CO6 Identify Customs duty provisions and valuation of imported goods. L3

01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 1 1 2 1
CO2 1 2 3 2 2
CO3 1 3 1 3 2
CO4 1 3 1 3
CO5 1 1 1
CO6 1 3 1 3
01.02.2023

4th Semester MBA HR Electives

CONFLICT & NEGOTIATION MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBAHR403 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
1. To understand the nature of various dimensions of conflict.
2. To learn various strategies and techniques to manage conflicts.
3. To understand the importance and role of negotiation in conflict resolution.
4. To understand the importance of cross-cultural and gender dimensions of negotiation.
Module-1 6 Hours
Introduction: Conflict: Definition, Meaning, Theories, Types of Conflicts - Productive (functional)
and Destructive (dysfunctional). Levels of conflict – intrapersonal, interpersonal, group &
organizational conflicts, Process and Structural Models. Myths about conflicts - of conflicts:
cognitive (Pseudo conflict), process (simple conflict) and Inter-personal conflict (ego conflict), causes
of conflict: common causes, organizational and interpersonal of conflict: traditional, Contemporary
and Integrationist, Causes for work place conflicts – Harassment and discrimination.

Module-2 7 Hours
Analogy of Conflict: Stages of conflicts: grievances- personal needs, lack of monetary benefits and
Incentives, promotion and recognition, harassment, discrimination, prejudice and Bias, identity,
unconcern attitudes of administration, frustration, escalation of Conflicts, and violence, Cost and effects
of conflicts. Perspectives of conflict - organizational and individuals. Spectrum of conflicts- Personal
conflicts, group conflicts, labour conflicts, social and political conflicts, Contingency conflict
management process, Cost of Workplace Conflict, conflict mapping and tracking

Module-3 7 Hours
Conflict Management: Nature of conflict Management, Managing conflict: Thomas conflict
resolution approach (Avoiding, Accommodating, Compromising, Competing, Collaboration)
behavioural style and conflict handling, Cosier Schank model of conflict resolution. Strategies for
resolving Individual, Team and organizational level conflict, Conflict Resolution Process –
Persuasion, Counselling and Reconciliation Skills, Negotiation and Arbitration, Skills for conflict
management – Listening, Mentoring, Mediating, Negotiating, Counselling, Diplomacy, EI (Emotional
Intelligence). Conflict Regulation Reduction, Resolution, Transformation

Module-4 6 Hours
Negotiation: Negotiations/ Negotiation strategies –Meaning , Six Foundations of Negotiation,
Negotiations, negotiation process, Principles for successful negotiations, Factors and essential skills
for negotiation, tricks used in negotiation process, psychological advantage of negotiations,
Techniques of negotiation, issues in negotiations. Negotiation strategies: Strategy and tactics for
01.02.2023

distributive bargaining

Module-5 7 Hours
Negotiation - Resolving Disputes: Dispute Settlement Negotiation (DSN) and Deal Making
Negotiation (DMN), importance of BATNA (Best alternative to a negotiated agreement) and ZOPA
(Zone of possible agreement) in Dispute Settlement, Negotiation Strategy and tactics for integrative
negotiation, negotiation strategy and planning. Finding and using negotiation power, sources of
power, Implications of Negotiation on Policy making, Ethics in negotiation.
Module-6 7 Hours
Managing Impasse and difficult negotiations
Impasse - Meaning, Definition Third party approaches: Third party interventions, formal intervention
methods – Arbitration, Mediation and Process Consultation, Informal intervention methods, best
practices in negotiation.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books

1. Corporate Conflict Management - Concepts and Skills, Eirene Leela Rout, Nelson Omiko,
Prentice India, 2007.
2. Negotiations, Roy J. Lewicki, David M. Saunders, Bruce Barry, 5/e, Mc Graw Hill, 2005,
ISBN: 9780072973075. Dividing students into groups and give a scenario to negotiate and
reach conclusion.
3. Fisher,R and Ury.W, (1986), Getting to Yes. Negotiating Agreement without Givingin.
London, Hutchinson Business Books Ltd.
4. Mark Gerzon, (2006) Leading Through Conflict, Harvard Business School Press,Boston,
USA.
5. Contemporary Conflict Resolution, Oliver Ramsbotham, Hugh Miall, Tom Woodhouse, 3rd
edition, Polity publishers, ISBN 0745649734, 9780745649733, 2011
6. Managing conflict and negotiation, B.D. Singh, 1st edition, Excel books, 2008.
7. Conflict Management: Practical guide to develop negotiation strategies, Barbara A Budjac
Corvette, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2006, ISBN: 8174466428, 9788174466426
8. Managing Conflict in Organizations, M. Afzalur Rahim, 4th Edition, Transaction Publishers,
2011, ISBN 1412844258, 9781412844253.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wYb_PKTawE4
 https://freevideolectures.com/course/3144/international-business-communication/28
 https://www.coursera.org/lecture/negotiation-skills-conflict/week-2-outline-neVhB
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/negotiation-and-conflict-management-e34393592.html
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/339850653_MANAGING_CONFLICT_AND_NEG
OTIATION

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.
01.02.2023

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Survey the conflict resolution techniques adopted by individuals based on individual
personality types.
 Dividing students into groups and give a scenario to negotiate and reach conclusion.
 Reading: 8 Habits of Highly Effective People; apply the concepts to understand how people
approach negotiation through different mind –sets.
 Conduct Role Plays for different scenarios.
 Solve various case studies dealing with conflict between teams and organizations.
 Ask students to identify three unconscious factors that may affect their negotiation
effectiveness and ask them to explain why or how that phenomenon may occur.
 Management games like two dollar game, cross the line games can be played in the class to
develop negotiation skills among the students.

Course outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand the concepts of conflict and negotiation and its role L2
CO2 Learn various contemporary methods of conflict and negotiation. L3
CO3 Gain insights of various conflict handling mechanisms L3
CO4 Demonstrate the cross-cultural and gender dimensions of negotiation L4

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1
0
CO1 1 3
CO2 2
CO3 1 2 4
CO4 1 2 3
01.02.2023

Global HRM
Course Code 22MBAHR404 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 The student will be able to identify the application of IHRM in managing and developing an
organization.
 The student will be able to understand International staffing and Training process.
 The student will be able to describe the compensation and performance management systems in
an international perspective.
 The student will be able to analyse the role of culture in international business.
 The student will be able to solve the workplace problems involving International issues.
 The student will be able to apply concepts and knowledge about the range of Human resource
functions to the deployment of expatriate employees.

Module-1 (6 Hours)
IHRM- Meaning and Definition, Objectives, The drivers of internationalization of business. HR
Challenges in a global workforce, Difference between IHRM and Domestic HRM, Functions of
global HRM, Emergence of Global HR Manager, Approaches to International Human Resource
Management, Culture and Cross-Cultural Management, Models of IHRM

Module-2 (6 Hours)
Concept of culture, International Culture Management, Role of culture in International business,
Models of Culture- Hofstede’s Four Cultural Dimensions, Globe’s Nine Cultural Dimensions, Edgar
Schein’s Model of Culture, Schneider’s Culture Model, cultural uniqueness vs. pan-culturalism,
Diversity Management-The paradox of diversity

Module-3 (7 Hours)
Staffing for international operations, Selection strategies for overseas assignments, Differentiating
between PCNs, TCNs and HCNs, International transfers, Expatriation and Repatriation, Expatriate
management, Repatriation Process, Challenges of repatriation and support practices.

Module-4 (7 Hours)
01.02.2023

Training and development: Training and development for expatriates; Training and development for
international staff. Compensation: Compensation in international perspective, Approaches to
international Compensation, International total rewards objectives for MNC’s, Key components of
global total rewards programs, Complexities faced by IHR managers.

Module-5 (7 Hours)
Performance management cycle, Key components of PMS, Performance Management of International
Assignees, Issues and challenges in international performance management, PMS for expatriates,
PMSs in six leading economies: China, India, Japan, South Korea, UK and USA.

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Equal opportunities, Diversity Management, Work–life balance: practices and discourses;
International Culture Management: Model Organisational Culture and Innovation, Models of Culture,
Hofstede’s Four, Cultural Dimensions, Trompenaar’s Seven Cultural
Dimensions,EthicsandcorporatesocialresponsibilityInternationallabourstandards.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
1. International Human Resource Management, Srinivas R. Kandula, Sage Publication India Pvt.
Ltd., 2018
2. International Human Resource Management, Anne-Wil Harzing, Ashly H. Pinnington, Sage
Publication
3. India Pvt. Ltd., 4/e, 2015
4. International Human Resource Management - Peter J. Dowling, Denice E. Welch, Cengage
Learning.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://www.airswift.com/blog/importance-of-cultural-awareness
 https://www.geektonight.com/international-human-resource-management/
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/265020002_Performance_management_in_internati
onal_human_resource_management

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Study and compare Recruitment, Selection and Training practices in various countries.
 Study Indian and US legal aspects involved when deploying an employee on an International
Assignment.
 Visit to an Organization and interact with IHR Manager and list out the roles played by IHR
manager.
 Solve a case study to understand the challenges faced by organizations in evaluating the
performance of international assignees.

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand various practices within the field of global HRM.
CO2 Describe HR concepts, policies and practices to deal with issues in an
international context.
CO3 Appraise the impact of global factors in shaping HR practices.
C04 Apply the concepts of HR in global perspective.
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

PERSONAL GROWTH AND INTERPERSONAL EFFECTIVENESS

Course Code 22MBAHR405 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50

Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100

Credits 03 Exam Hours 03

Course Learning objectives:

 The student will be able to describe and Identify the application of various PG and IE
framework
 The student will be able to describe and explain in her/his own words, the relevance and
importance of various PG and IE to be adopted in the Organisation
 The student will be able to apply and improve the workplace effectiveness through various PG
and IE
 The student will be able to classify and categorise different PG and IE practices and to be
followed in the Organisation
 The student will be able to create and reconstruct Leadership required to manage the Human
Resources in the Organisation
 The student will be able to appraise and judge the practical applicability of various PG and IE
practices to be followed in the Organisation

Module-1 (5 Hours)

Dynamics of Personal Growth Meaning, nature and scope of personal growth. Self-awareness and
self-esteem, life roles, social roles and organisational roles, role clarity and role boundaries. Ego
states- Id, ego and super ego and defense mechanism. Developing a self-improvement plan.

Module-2 (6 Hours)

Interpersonal Trust: Openness, confidentiality, blind spot and unknown part of personality. Self-
disclosure, seeking feedback, self-reflection and practicing new behaviors. Discovering facets of
interpersonal trust through Johari Window.

Module-3 (7 Hours)

Understanding Human Personality and Neuro Functioning: Personality theories, Carl Jung's
theory of personality types and Myers Briggs Type Indicator test (MBTI), Trait theories- Guilford
Peogut, PF 16 and Type A and B, Emotional intelligence. Basic functions of mind: Creativity and
innovation. Blocks to creativity. Creativity processes and tools- convergent and divergent thinking.
Six thinking Hats, Neuro Linguistic Programming.

Module-4 (8 Hours)
01.02.2023

Attitudes, Beliefs, Values and their impact on Behaviour:

Personal change meaning, nature and requisites. Social adjustments and habit formation. Locus of control. Habits of
personal effectiveness. Seven habits of highly effective people.

Module-5 (8 Hours)

Interpersonal relations and personal growth: Interpersonal needs for openness, inclusion and
control. Discovering the interpersonal orientation through FIRO-B. Conflict resolution and
negotiation, time management and honouring the commitments

Module-6 (7 Hours)

Transactional Analysis: Ego states, types of transactions and time structuring. Life position, scripts
and games; T-group sensitivity training, encounter groups, appreciative enquiry and group relations
conference (students may go through three days personal growth lab for experiential learning)
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is 50%. The minimum
passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks
of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to
each course if the student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE
(Semester End Examination) taken together.

Continuous Internal Evaluation:

There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.

CIE Marks shall be based on:

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work
and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors are given
autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain necessary
supporting documents for same.

Semester End Examination:

The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books:
1. Organisational Behaviour: Human Behaviour at work John W. Newstrom and Keith Davis,
Tata McGraw Hill, 11/e, 2003
2. Human Relations in organisations , Robert N. Lussier, Mc- Graw Hill Education,6/e.
3. Development of Management Skills, Whetten & Cameron, PHI,7/e.
4. Competency Mapping Assessment and Growth, Naik G. P, IIHRM,2010.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC.yuqvNiMlYIeIW7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzEEdnRpZAME
c2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660164911/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fidoc.pub%2fdocuments%2fpersonal-growth-
and-interpersonal-effectiveness-ylyx3eompqnm/RK=2/RS=n8xZOt_T_bFC68F4X7UAwxMwkv4-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC.yuqvNiMlYIeoW7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzIEdnRpZAME
c2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660164911/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.tppl.org.in%2f2020%2fall-stream-
books%2f6244-personal-growth-and-interpersonal-effectiveness-
.html/RK=2/RS=rpRdeJi7et9M8tFNBcBdlaXNTdI-
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC.yuqvNiMlYIhoW7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAzQEdnRpZAM
Ec2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660164911/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.scribd.com%2fpresentation%2f318352
003%2fPersonal-Growth-and-Interpersonal-Effectiveness-
PPT/RK=2/RS=2IWkxWYX9qUIPdMH461FNs0M1FI-

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Students are expected to conduct an in-depth study about various personality traits & TA and
submit a detailed report.
 Students must undergo psychometric test like MBTI, FIRO-B, Big Five etc, conduct SWOT
analysis and prepare a personal growth plan based on the results
 Ask the individual students to seek multisource feedback about their interpersonal
effectiveness from peers, teachers, and parents; understand and reflect the feedback and
prepare a development plan for interpersonal effectiveness.
 Discuss a Johari Window case in the class to identify how it can help each individual student
to promote his/ her personal growth.
 Organize a workshop on MBTI for the students to know their type and to understand the type
dynamics.
 Organize a Neuro linguistic programming workshop for the participation of all HR students
01.02.2023

Course outcome

At the end of the course the student will be able to :

Sl. No. Description Blooms Level

CO1 Have in-depth understanding the various personality traits which L1/L2
promotes personal growth.
CO2 Analyze the concepts of human personality, behaviour and L3
functioning of mind
CO3 Learn and apply the psychometrics tests in understanding the L4
personality traits.
CO4 Develop the greater insight of self, and others through various L4
theories and prepare the developmental plan for interpersonal
effectiveness.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

STRATEGIC TALENT MANAGEMENT

Course Code 22MBAHR406 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To make the students realize the challenges of acquisition and retention of talents for the
competitive advantage of the organization.
 To develop a conceptual understanding of the management of talents in the competitive
environment.
 To understand how important is to develop and retain the best talents in the industry.
 To understand the concepts of competency and its usage in evaluating a person’s work.
 To get an idea about different tools in identifying required competencies in a person.

Module-1 (6 Hours)
Basics of Talent Management: Talent- engine of new economy, difference between talents and
knowledge workers, leveraging talent, the talent value chain, elements of talent friendly
organizations, talent management process, Talent Management System – Components and benefits of
Talent Management System; creating TMS, challenges of TMS, Building blocks of talents
management: competencies – performance management, conducting performance reviews,
Appraising executive talent, selecting the right appraisal.

Module-2 (6 Hours)
Talent Planning: Concept, succession management process, Integrating succession planning and
career planning, designing succession planning program, strategic accountability approach in
developing the workforce, balanced scorecard, talent development budget, contingency plan for
talent; building a reservoir of talent, compensation management within the context of talent
management, CEO Succession planning.
Module-3 (7 Hours)
Developing and Retaining Talent – Potential identification and development, coaching for sustained
&desired change, integrating coaching, training and development with talent management ,employee
retention- motivation and engagement, Return on talent; age of analytics, making outplacement as a
part of talent strategy, developing talent management information system.

Module-4 (7 Hours)
Competency mapping: Concepts and definition of competency; types of competencies, competency
based HR systems, competency and performance, 5 level competency model, developing various
competency models, how competencies relate to career development and organizational goals.
Module-5 (7 Hours)
Methodology of competency mapping : competency model development ,competency models,
people capability maturity model ,developing competency framework , competency profiling ,
competency mapping tools , use of psychological testing in competency mapping , competency based
interviewing.
01.02.2023

Module-6 (7 Hours)
Measuring Performance, Assessment and Development Centre: performance assessment,
diagnosing reasons for performance problems, designing an effective performance management
systems, sources of errors in performance measurement. Assessment and Development Centre :
concepts , importance and uses of assessments centre in selecting employees , difference between
assessment and development centre, assessment centre approach to competence building , profile of
the assessors, steps in assessment centre, designing the assessment centre.
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books:
1. Talent Management – Gowri Joshi, Veena Vohra, Cengage Learning, 2018.
2. The Talent Management Hand Book – Lance A. Berger & Dorothy R. Berger, Tata McGraw
Hill.
3. Competence at work – Lyle M. Spencer, Signe M. Spencer. John Wiley, 1993.
4. A Handbook of Competency Mapping – Seema Sangi, Response BOOKS, 2004.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.pdfdrive.com/the-talent-management-handbook-e33563313.html
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/228672156_Strategic_Talent_Management_A_revie
w_and_research_agenda
 https://hvtc.edu.vn/Portals/0/files/635834387511001885talent-management-a-focus-on-
excellence.pdf
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Pk8hN7lw_RA
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZG8coejZoSg
 https://www.tutorialspoint.com/talent_management/talent_management_tutorial.pdf

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Students are expected to conduct a study on how talents are acquired and retained – in various
industries – and various strategies followed by the respective companies.
 Discussion on “How to have/ evaluate the performance of the MBA students”.
 Ask the students to find out the best employer surveys conducted during the past one year and
make a presentation.
 Identify the important positions in your college or any other organization and ascertain the
measures if any taken to develop second line of leadership.
 Ask the students to collect data about the position of principal, director, and other teachers in
your college and prepare a competency dictionary for the said positions.
 Presentation by students about the competency directory profiling of various positions.
 Ask the students to role play the behavioural event interview to collect data for competency
mapping for the position of management professor.
01.02.2023

Course outcome
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. No. Description Blooms Level
CO1 Aquire knowledge and the various challenges of acquisition and L1/L2
retention of talents for competitive advantage of the organization.
CO2 Gain insights to develop and retain best talents in the industry. L3
CO3 Learn the concepts of competency and its usage in evaluating a L4
person’s
CO4 Adhere knowledge in the identified competencies. L4

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 2 2 3
01.02.2023

4th Semester MBA Business Analytics Electives

Machine learning
Course Code 22MBABA403 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To acquaint students with theoretical and practical knowledge on machine learning.
 To make students to apply the concepts of Machine learning
 To make students to understand the technology integration and importance of data
analytics
 To make students to analyse using the Machine learning techniques for business decisions
Module-1 6 Hours
Introduction to Machine Learning: Creativity and motivation, Computer hardware architecture,
understanding programming, word and sentence, Conversing with Python, Terminology,
Debugging, The learning journey.
Module-2 6 Hours
Supervised and Unsupervised Learning :Regression and classification models, Decision tree,
Classification of regression trees, linear, multiple, logistic regression ,neutral networks, multi layer
perception ,support vector machines, linear and non-linear kernel functions, introduction to clustering and
k model clustering.
Module-3 7 Hours
Decision tree and generic algorithms: Basic decision tree algorithm, information gain,
hypothesis space, inductive bias, issues in decision tree learning, determining the correct and final
tree size, purning. Genetic Algorithms: Motivation, Genetic Algorithms: Representing Hypotheses,
Genetic Operator, Fitness Function and Selection, An Illustrative Example, Hypothesis Space
Search, Genetic Programming, Models of Evolution and Learning: Lamarkian Evolution, Baldwin
Effect, Parallelizing Genetic Algorithms.

Module-4 7 Hours
Ensemble and probabilistic learning: Model Combination Schemes, Voting, Error-Correcting
Output Codes, Bagging: Random Forest Trees, Boosting: Adaboost, Stacking. Gaussian mixture
models - The Expectation-Maximization (EM) Algorithm, Information Criteria, Nearest neighbour
methods - Nearest Neighbour Smoothing, Efficient Distance Computations: the KD-Tree, Distance
Measures
Module-5 7 Hours
01.02.2023

Reinforcement Learning and Evaluating Hypotheses: Learning Task, Q Learning, Non

deterministic Rewards and actions, temporal-difference learning, Relationship to Dynamic
Programming, Active reinforcement learning, Generalization in reinforcement learning.
Motivation, Basics of Sampling Theory: Error Estimation and Estimating Binomial Proportions,
The Binomial Distribution, Estimators, Bias, and Variance
Module-6 7 Hours
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Virtual Environment: Computer and Real time computer
graphics, Flight Simulation, Virtual environment requirement, benefits of virtual reality
Augmented Reality: Taxonomy, technology and features of augmented reality, difference
between AR and VR, Challenges with AR, AR systems and functionality, Augmented reality
methods, visualization techniques for augmented reality, enhancing interactivity in AR
environments, evaluating AR systems.

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE)
is 50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum
passing marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have
satisfied the academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the
student secures not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and
SEE (Semester End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight
is compulsory.
 No Laboratory exam for this course.

Suggested Learning Resources:Books:

1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
2. Bishop, Christopher. Neural Networks for Pattern Recognition. New York, NY: Oxford
University Press, 1995
01.02.2023

3. EthemAlpaydin, (2004) “Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and

Machine Learning)”, The MIT Press
4. T.astie, R. Tibshirani, J. H. Friedman, “The Elements of Statistical Learning”,
Springer(2nd Ed.), 2009

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKEtVjfPdijgcUVXy7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG
9zAzEEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660415204/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fww
w.globalsqa.com%2ffree-machine-learning-

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKEtVjfPdijgcUV3y7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9
zAzIEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660415204/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fai.sta
nford.edu%2f~nilsson%2fMLBOOK.pdf/RK=2/RS=KWhp7r2qOpmAwpK8yjApfSnMirE
-

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used
with due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Practice on visualisation of data tools and understand the machine interaction
 Analyse the Google map for traffic congestion in a big city if IOT is implemented
 Learn simple algorithms and solve business problems using decision tree and simulations

Course outcome:
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand the concepts of Machine learning L2
CO2 Apply the knowledge of Data visualisation and accurate decision making L3

CO3 Analyse the Big data and pattern using machine learning algorithms L4
CO4 Evaluate the Data Structure and provide immersive experience to users L5
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3

CO2 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 2

CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

HR Analytics
Course Code 22MBABA404 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 To introduce the student to the theory, concepts, and business application of human resources
research, data, metrics, systems, analyses, and reporting.
 To develop an understanding of the role and importance of HR analytics, and the ability to
track, store, retrieve, analyse and interpret HR data to support decision making.
 To aware the challenges human resources analytics for the competitive advantage of the
organization.
 To enable students to use applicable benchmarks/metrics to conduct research and statistical
analyses related to Human Resource Management.
Module-1 6 Hours
HR Analytics in Perspective: Role of Analytics, Defining HR Analytics, HR Analytics: The Third
Wave for HR value creation, HR Measurement journey in tune with HR maturity journey
Understanding the organizational system (Lean), Locating the HR challenge in the system , Valuing
HR Analytics in the organizational system.
Module-2 6 Hours
HRA Frameworks: Current approaches to measuring HR and reporting value from HR
contributions, Strategic HR Metrics versus Benchmarking, HR Scorecards & Workforce Scorecards
and how they are different from HR Analytics, HR Maturity Framework: From level 1 to level 5,
HR Analytics Frameworks: (a) LAMP framework; (b) HCM:21 Framework and (c) Talentship
Framework, 5 overarching
Module-3 7 Hourscomponents of an effective Analytics framework.
Basics of HR Analytics: Basics of HR Analytics, what is Analytics, Evolution, Analytical
capabilities, Analytic value chain, Analytical Model, Typical application of HR analytics.
Predictive Analytics: Steps involved in predictive analytics: Determine key performance indicator,
analyse and report data, interpreting the results and predicting the future. Metrics and Regression
analysis and Causation.
Module-4 7 Hours
Insight into Data Driven HRA: Typical data sources, Typical questions faced (survey), Typical data
issues, Connecting HR Analytics to business benefit (case studies), Techniques for establishing
questions, Building support and interest, Obtaining data, Cleaning data (exercise), Supplementing
data.
Module-5 7 Hours
HR Matrics – Defining metrics, Demographics, data sources and requirements, Types of data, tying
data sets together, Difficulties in obtaining data, ethics of measurement and evaluation. Human capital
analytics continuum. HR Dashboards. Statistical software used for HR analytics: MS-Excel, IBM-
SPSS, IBMAMOS, SAS, and R programming and data visualisation tools such as Tableau, Ploty,
Click view and Fusion Charts.
Module-6 7 Hours
01.02.2023

HR Scorecard: Assessing HR Program, engagement and Turnover, Finding money in Analytics,

Linking HR Data to operational performance, HR Data and stock performance. Creating HR
Scorecard, develop an HR measurement system, guidelines for implementing a HR Scorecard.
Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)
The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing
marks in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures
not less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester
End Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination,
field work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course
instructors are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and
should maintain necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately
reduced to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is
compulsory.
 No Laboratory exam for this course.
01.02.2023

Suggested Learning Resources:

Books
• Moore, McCabe, Duckworth, and Alwan. The Practice of Business Statistics: Using Data for
Decisions, Second Edition, New York: W.H.Freeman, 2008.
• Predictive analytics for Human Resources, Jac Fitz- enz, John R. Mattox, II, Wiley, 2014.
• Human Capital Analytics: Gene Pease Boyce Byerly, Jac Fitz-enz, Wiley,2013.
• The HR Scorecard: Linking People, Strategy, and Performance, by Brian E. Becker, Mark A.
Huselid, Mark A Huselid, David Ulrich, 2001.
• HR Analytics: The What, Why and How, by Tracey Smith
• The New HR Analytics: Predicting the Economic Value of Your Company's Human By Jac
FITZ-ENZ, 2010.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://www.pdfdrive.com/predictive-hr-analytics-mastering-the-hr-metric-e188006190.html
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/hr-metrics-and-workforce-analytics-e20835652.html
 http://u.camdemy.com/sysdata/doc/f/fb30e8a98c5d9a85/pdf.pdf
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zogLCssW0Ts
 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/110104086/L05.html
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wcs-wlkTJlc

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with
due regards to copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

• To solve case studies on Workplace Ethics Discussion on “How to have/ evaluate the
performance of the MBA students”
• To visit organizations and find out the problems and causes for unethical behavior at Workplace.
• Identify the important HR metrics used in manufacturing companies.
• Ask students to collect manpower data of your institute and prepare HR Dashboards.
• Collect the payroll detail from IT Company and use module 6 contents.
01.02.2023

Course outcome:
At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Have an understanding of How HR function adds value and demonstrates L2
the value in business terms
CO2 Measure the value of Intangibles that HR helps builds for the organization L3
given a particular business context to facilitate decision making.
CO3 Convert soft factors in a people management context into measurable L4
variables across various domains.
CO4 Devise, conduct and analyse a study on employees or any other related to L5
the HR context in an organization.

Mapping of COS and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

BIG DATA
Course Code 22MBABA405 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 Total Marks 100
Credits 03 Exam Hours 03
Course Learning objectives:
 Understand the Big Data Platform and its Use cases
 Provide an overview of Apache Hadoop
 Provide HDFS Concepts and Interfacing with HDFS
 Understand Map Reduce Jobs
 Exposure to Data Analytics with R.
 Apply analytics on Structured, Unstructured Data.
Module-1 6 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA AND HADOOP :Types of Digital Data, Introduction to Big
Data, Big Data Analytics, History of Hadoop, Apache Hadoop, Analysing Data with Unix tools,
Analysing Data with Hadoop, Hadoop Streaming, Hadoop Echo System, IBM Big Data Strategy,
Introduction to Info sphere Big Insights and Big Sheets.
Module-2 7 Hours
HDFS (Hadoop Distributed File System:The Design of HDFS, HDFS Concepts, Command Line
Interface, Hadoop file system interfaces, Data flow, Data Ingest with Flume and Scoop and Hadoop
archives, Hadoop I/O: Compression, Serialization, Avro and File-Based Data structures.
Module-3 6 Hours
Map Reduce: Anatomy of a Map Reduce Job Run, Failures, Job Scheduling, Shuffle and Sort, Task
Execution, Map Reduce Types and Formats, Map Reduce Features.
Module-4 7 Hours
Hadoop Eco System :Introduction to PIG, Execution Modes of Pig, Comparison of Pig with Databases,
Grunt, Pig Latin, User Defined Functions, Data Processing operators.
Hive: Hive Shell, Hive Services, Hive Metastore, Comparison with Traditional Databases, HiveQL,
Tables, Querying Data and User Defined Functions. HBase :HBasics, Concepts, Clients,

Module-5 7 Hours
Data Analytics with R: Introduction, Supervised Learning, Unsupervised Learning, Collaborative
Filtering.Big Data Analytics with Big R.

Module-6 7 Hours
NoSQL , Searching and Indexing Big Data: Structured and Unstructured Data, Taxonomy and
NoSQL Implementation, Discussion of basic architecture of Hbase, Cassandra and MongoDb
Full text Indexing and Searching, Indexing with Lucene, Distributed Searching with Elastic search.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks
in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the
academic requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures not
less than 50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End
Examination) taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the
maximum marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field
work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors
are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain
necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced
to 50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from question
number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number eight is compulsory.
 No Laboratory exam for this course.

Suggested Learning Resources:Books

1. Tom White “Hadoop: The Definitive Guide” Third Edit on, O’reily Media, 2012.
2. Seema Acharya, SubhasiniChellappan, "Big Data Analytics" Wiley 2015.
3. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, "Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2007.
4. Jay Liebowitz, “Big Data and Business Analytics” Auerbach Publications, CRC press (2013)
01.02.2023

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrKC2qQjvdij9UV_2.7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAz
MEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660419857/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fwww.crayond
ata.com%2fdownload-12-free-ebooks-on-big-
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rvJgArru8dI
 https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=big%20data
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/big-data-books.html

Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to copy
rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 Visit amazon website and do observe how often change the design the website and update
information
 Understand Walmart strategies for competitive advantage using big data analytics

Course outcome :At the end of the course the student will be able to :
Sl. Description Blooms
No. Level
CO1 Understand Big Data and its Business Implications L2
CO2 Apply the knowledge of Hadoop and Hadoop Eco-System in big data analysis L3
CO3 Analyse the big data and provide data visualization and helps in decisions L4
CO4 Develop Big Data Solutions using Hadoop Eco System L5
CO5 Apply Machine Learning Techniques using R L3
CO6 Understanding about NoSQL and Indexing in Big data L2
01.02.2023

Mapping of COS and Pos

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
CO5 1 2 3
CO6 2 2 2
01.02.2023

FINANCIAL ANALYTICS
CIE
Course Code 22MBABA406 50
Marks
SEE
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 2:2:0 50
Marks
Total
Total Hours of Pedagogy 40 100
Marks
Exam
Credits : 03 03
Hours
Course Learning Objectives:
 To understand the basic concepts of Data analytics
 To Gain an insight into the decision making under uncertainty circumstances based on results
 To apply the statistical tools in financial analytics for solving business problems
 To equip students with necessary analytical skills using excel and SPSS software
Module-1
Essentials of Financial Analytics: Introduction to Business Analytics: Meaning, Business Analytics in
Decision Making; Categorization of Analytical methods and models: Descriptive -Predictive -
Prescriptive–Big data; Financial Analytics; Importance -uses-Features; Nature of data in finance and
sources of data
Module-2
Statistical concepts: Probability, Discrete and Continuous probability distribution, Decision making
under uncertainty, Confidence Interval, Hypothesis testing.
Module-3
Time – Series: Stochastic Process, Components of time series data - Trend Analysis, Seasonality and
cyclical behaviour; Concept of Stationary process; Smoothing Methods- Moving Average, Weighted
Moving Average, Exponential smoothing methods – Single exponential, Double exponential; Forecasting
Model ARIMA (Using MS Excel)
Module-4
Multivariate time-series analysis-Building long-term relationship between variables, choosing the
model based on stationarity of the data. Vector Auto Regression (VAR) – Form, estimation and
interpretation of result.
Module-5
Regression Analysis: Regression v/s Causation, Simple linear regression, Least Squares Method, Using
Regression equation for estimation, Multiple Regression Model, Regression analysis using MS Excel;

Module-6

Computer lab: Introduction to Jamovi. Real-time Practical Assessment in the Computer lab, Advanced
Excel.
01.02.2023

Assessment Details (both CIE and SEE)

The weightage of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) is 50% and for Semester End Exam (SEE) is
50%. The minimum passing marks for the CIE is 50% of the maximum marks. Minimum passing marks
in SEE is 40% of the maximum marks of SEE. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the academic
requirements (passed) and earned the credits allotted to each course if the student secures not less than
50% in the sum total of the CIE (Continuous Internal Evaluation) and SEE (Semester End Examination)
taken together.
Continuous Internal Evaluation:
There shall be a maximum of 50 CIE Marks. A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum
marks prescribed for the CIE.
CIE Marks shall be based on:
a) Tests (for 25Marks) and
b) Assignments, presentations, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field
work and class participation etc., (for 25 Marks) conducted in the respective course. Course instructors
are given autonomy in choosing a few of the above based on the subject relevance and should maintain
necessary supporting documents for same.
Semester End Examination:
The SEE question paper will be set for 100 marks and the marks scored will be proportionately reduced to
50.
 The question paper will have 8 full questions carrying equal marks.
 Each full question is for 20 marks with 3 sub questions.
 Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics.
 The students will have to answer five full questions; selecting four full questions from
question number one to seven in the pattern of 3, 7 & 10 Marks and question number
eight is compulsory.
 No Laboratory exams for this course.

Suggested Learning Resources: Books

 Basic Econometrics Damodar N Gujarati, Dawn Porter, Sangeetha Gunashekar McGraw Hill
Education 5th, 2017
 Financial Econometrics Oliver Linton Cambridge University Press, 1st, 2019
 Introductory Econometrics for Finance Chris Brooks Cambridge University Press 4th, 2019.
 Spreadsheet skills for Finance Professionals Pitabas Mohanty Taxmann’s 2nd, 2020.

Web links and Video Lectures (e-Resources):

01.02.2023

 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrPpk6rQ_diy2YTchK7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zAz
YEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660400683/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fcorporatefinan
ceinstitute.com%2fresources%2febooks%2fanalyst-trifecta-ebook-
pdf%2f/RK=2/RS=GU5U05axvSbcRt9TbAEysqyOD5Y-
 https://www.pdfdrive.com/financial-statement-analysis-books.html
 https://r.search.yahoo.com/_ylt=AwrPpHyqR_diEp8TTQK7HAx.;_ylu=Y29sbwNzZzMEcG9zA
zMEdnRpZAMEc2VjA3Ny/RV=2/RE=1660401706/RO=10/RU=https%3a%2f%2fround-lake.dustinice.workers.dev%3a443%2fhttps%2fcorporatefina
nceinstitute.com%2fresources%2febooks%2fanalyst-trifecta-ebook-
pdf%2f/RK=2/RS=9WRyngvp15QjtBSAgeNzY6oWzPo-


Note: The aforesaid links and study materials are suggestive in nature, they may be used with due regards to
copy rights, patenting and other IPR rules.

Skill Development Activities Suggested

 To collect secondary data from stock market, do the fundamental and technical analysis
for decision to buy or not to buy stocks/shares
 Download the open software of python and R software and practice the data analytics
and make financial projections
 Get trained outside to earn data analytics certification on econometric models

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Sl. Description Blooms Level

No.
CO1 Understand and perform the basics of financial analytics. L2
CO2 Application of quantitative methods for financial data analysis. L3
CO3 Apply Multivariate time series analysis for financial data of any business L3

CO4 Analyse the data using Jamovi real world application L4

Mapping of COs and POs

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
CO1 1 2 3
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 2 2 1 2
01.02.2023

GUIDELINES FOR 6 WEEK PROJECT WORK 22MBAPR407

(BETWEEN 3RD AND 4TH SEMESTER MBA)

PROJECT REPORT
Course Code 22MBAPR407 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week (L:P:SDA) 0:12:0 SEE Marks 50
Total Hours of Pedagogy 00 Total Marks 100
Credits : 06 Exam Hours 00
OBJECTIVE
To expose the students to understand the working of the organization/company / industry and
take up an in-depth study of an issue / problem in the area of specialization.

STRUCTURE
The Project Work shall consist of study of any organizational Problem based on specialization
for 6 credits for 6 weeks.

GENERAL GUIDELINES
 The project work shall be for a period of 6 weeks immediately after the completion of 3rd
SEE but before the commencement of the 4th semester classes.
 The Course code of the project report shall be 22MBAPR407 and shall be compulsory for all
the students opting for all specializations.
 The University shall receive 2 copies of project reports prior to the commencement of the 4th
semester examination. Copies of the project report should be sent to the concerned Regional
Office with intimation to the Registrar (Evaluation).
 By keeping the business trend in the present scenario, university has given an option to the
students to select the research problem either from business organization or they can carry
out the project on freelance basis subject to the approval of department committee.
 It is the total responsibility of the internal guide to monitor the freelance project.
 In case, business problem selected from a Company, no two students of an institute shall
work on the same problem in the same organization.
 The student shall seek the guidance of the internal guide on a continuous basis, and the guide
shall give a certificate to the effect that the candidate has worked satisfactorily under his/her
guidance.
 On completion of the project work, student shall prepare a report with the following format.
 The Project report shall be prepared using word processor viz. MS Word with New Times
Roman, 12 font size.
 All the reports shall be printed in the A4 size 1” margin on all the sides.
 The report shall be hard bound facing sheet of royal blue color indicating the title of college
and month & year of admission (spiral binding not permitted).
 A certificate by the guide, HOD and Head of the institution indicating the bonafide
performance of the project by the student to be enclosed.
 An undertaking by the student to the effect that the work is independently carried out by
him/her.
 The certificate from the organization if applicable (if its Freelance project, certificate is not
required and internal guide can issue a certificate for successful completion).
01.02.2023

 Acknowledgement
 Executive Summary.

Project Report Evaluation:

 Internal evaluation will be done by the internal guide.
 External valuation shall be done by a faculty members of other PG centres of VTU and for
The affiliated institutions projects evaluation done by the faculty member of other institute
drawn from VTU affiliated institute or VTU PG Centres with minimum of 10 years
experience.
 Viva-Voce / Presentation: A viva-voce examination shall be conducted at the respective
Institution where a student is expected to give a presentation of his/ her work.
 The viva –voce examination will be conducted by the respective HOD / Senior faculty of the
department and an expert drawn from the VTU affiliated institutes/ VTU PG Centres with
minimum of 10 years of experience as appointed by the University.
 Project work carries 100 marks consisting of 50 marks for internal marks by the internal
guide, average of 25 marks from both internal and external evaluation and 25 marks for viva-
voce examination. Minimum passing marks of the Project work is 50% in each of the
components such as Internal Marks, report evaluation and viva-voce examination.
 Format of the project report shall be prepared using the word processor viz., MS Word,
Times New Roman font sized 12, on a page layout of A4 size with 1inch margin all sides
(1.5inch on left side) and 1.5 line spacing. The Project report shall not exceed 100 pages.
 Submission of Report: Students should submit the Project Report in electronic data form
only, in PDF file (Un-editable Format) to the Institute. The Institute in turn shall submit all
the CD’s of their students along with a consolidated master list as per specialization
containing USN, Name of the student, and Title of the Report to Registrar Evaluation) one
week before the commencement of the Theory Examinations or as per notification given for
this purpose.
 Plagiarism: Plagiarism is considered as academically fraudulent, and an offence against
University academic discipline. The University considers plagiarism to be a major offence,
and subject to the corrective procedures. It is compulsory for the student to get the plagiarism
check done before submission of the project report. Plagiarism of up to 25% is allowed in the
project work and report should consist 75% of original content/work.
 Publication of Research Findings: Students are expected to present their research findings in
Seminars/ Conferences/ Technical/ Management Fests or publish their research work in
Journals in association with their Internal Guide. Appropriate Weightage should be given to
this in the internal evaluation as well as in the viva voce examination of the project report.

CONTENTS OF THE INTERNSHIP REPORT

 Cover page
 Certificate from the Organization (scanned copy if applicable)
01.02.2023

 Certificate from the guide, HOD and Head of the Institution (scanned copy) indicating
bonafide performance of Project by the student
 Declaration by the student (scanned copy)
 Acknowledgement
 Table of contents
 List of tables and graphs
 Executive summary
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction, Industry profile and company profile: Promoters, vision, Mission & Quality Policy.
Products / services profile areas of operation, infrastructure facilities, competitor’s information,
SWOT Analysis, Future growth and prospects and Financial Statement.
Chapter 2: Conceptual background and Literature review
Theoretical background of the study, Literature review with research gap (with minimum 20
literature reviews).
Chapter 3: Research Design
Statement of the problem, Need for the study, Objectives, Scope of the study, Research
methodology, Hypotheses, Limitations, Chapter scheme.
Chapter 4: Analysis and Interpretation
Analysis and interpretation of the data- collected with relevant tables and graphs. Results
obtained by the using statistical tools must be included.
Chapter 5: Findings, Conclusion and Suggestions
Summary of findings, Conclusion and Suggestions / Recommendations
Bibliography: Books, Articles names, etc. to be mentioned as per APA style.
Annexure: Relevant to the project such as figures, graphs, photographs etc.,
01.02.2023

Rubrics for Project Work (Common to core and Dual Specializations)- 22MBAPR 407

Evaluation
Sl.No. Particulars Marks
Type
Internal Assessment by the Guide- Based on three
1 CIE Presentations by Students 50
Report Evaluation by the Guide & External Examiner
2 SEE Average of the marks awarded by the two Examiners shall 25
be the final evaluation marks for the Dissertation.
Viva-Voce Examination to be conducted by the Guide and
3 SEE an External examiner from the Industry/ Institute (Joint 25
Evaluation)
Total 100

Rubrics for Project Evaluation and Viva voce Examination

A. Internal Assessment by the Guide- Based on three Presentations by Students

Sl.No. Aspects Marks

1 First Presentation 5
2 Second Presentation 5
3 Third Presentation 5
4 Introduction and Methodology 5
5 Industry and Company Profile 5
6 Theoretical background of study 5
7 Data analysis and interpretation 10
8 Summary of findings, suggestions and conclusion 10
Total 50

B. Report Evaluation by the Guide & External Examiner. Average of the marks awarded by the
two Examiners shall be the final evaluation marks for the Dissertation.

Sl.No. Aspects Marks

1 Introduction & Relevance of the project 5
2 Conceptual background and literature review 5
3 Research design 5
4 Analysis and interpretation 5
5 Summary of findings, suggestions and conclusion 5
Total 25
01.02.2023

C. Viva-Voce Examination to be conducted by the HOD/ Guide and an External examiner

from the Industry/ Institute (Joint Evaluation)

Sl.No. Aspects Marks

1 Presentation and Communication Skills 5
2 Subject knowledge 5
3 Objectives of the study and Methodology 5
4 Analysis using statistical tools and statistical packages 5
5 Findings and appropriate suggestions 5
Total 25

MARKS SHEET FORMATS

1. Internal Assessment by the Guide- Based on three Presentations by Students
Visvesvaraya Technological University
Marks Sheet for MBA Project Work (22MBAPR407)
Name of the College: College Code:
Internal Marks Allocation for Project Work (22MBAPR407)

Sl.No. Aspects Marks

1 First Presentation 5
2 Second Presentation 5
3 Third Presentation 5
4 Introduction and Methodology 5
5 Industry and Company Profile 5
6 Theoretical background of study 5
7 Data analysis and interpretation 10
8 Summary of findings, suggestions and conclusion 10
Total 50

Marks Sheet
Sl.No. USN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Total
1
2
3
4
5

Signature of the Internal Guide with Name, Address & Date

01.02.2023

Note:
1. Total Internal Evaluation Marks of the Project report should be sent along with the other
subject internal marks and the above marks sheet should be maintained by the
Department/Institution for verification on demand.
2. Total Internal Evaluation Marks of the Project report should be uploaded to VTU by the
Internal guide after thorough evaluation of the project report and the copy of the mark
sheet downloaded after the entry must be maintained in the department as well as sent to
VTU along with the remuneration bill.

2. Report Evaluation by the Guide & External Examiner.

Average of the marks awarded by the two Examiners shall be the final evaluation marks
for the Dissertation.
Visvesvaraya Technological University

Marks Sheet for MBA Project Work (22MBAPR407)

Name of the College: College Code:
External Evaluation Marks Allocation for Project Work (22MBAPR407)
Sl.No. Aspects Marks
1 Introduction & Relevance of the project 5
2 Conceptual background and literature review 5
3 Research design 5
4 Analysis and interpretation 5
5 Summary of findings, suggestions and conclusion 5
Total 25

Marks Sheet
Sl.No. USN 1 2 3 4 5 Total
1
2
3
4
5

Signature of External Examiner with affiliation

Note:
1. Total External Evaluation Marks of the Project report should be uploaded to VTU by the
External examiner appointed by VTU after thorough evaluation of the project report and the
copy of the mark sheet downloaded after the entry must be sent to VTU along with the
remuneration bill.
01.02.2023

3. Viva-Voce Examination to be conducted by the HOD/ Guide and an External examiner

from the Industry/ Institute (Joint Evaluation)
Visvesvaraya Technological University
Marks Sheet for MBA Project Work (22MBAPR407)
Name of the College: College Code:
Viva voce Marks Allocation for Project Work (22MBAPR407)
(Viva voce conducted by HOD/Internal Guide and an Expert from VTU.)
Sl.No. Aspects Marks
1 Presentation and Communication Skills 5
2 Subject knowledge 5
3 Objectives of the study and Methodology 5
4 Analysis using statistical tools and statistical packages 5
5 Findings and appropriate suggestions 5
Total 25

Marks Sheet
Sl.No. USN 1 2 3 4 5 Total
1
2
3
4
5

Signature of Internal Examiner Signature of External Examiner with affiliation

Note: Marks may be finalized based on the joint evaluation by internal examiner and External
examiner.
01.02.2023

Schedule to be followed before commencement of Project

Activity Timeline Remarks
Identifying the Student individually identifies an organization
organization First week OR identifies problem for his/her study,
Problem identification according to his/her interest.
His/ Her interests are discussed with project
Problem statement Second
guides. Discussion with Internal Guide to decide
Research Design week
on suitable design for the research
Preparation of Synopsis* & formulating the
Synopsis Preparation Third week
objectives
The student will present the synopsis with the
detailed execution plan to the Internal Guide and
Presentation of Fourth
HOD who will review and may: a. Approve b.
Synopsis Week
Approve with modification or c. Reject for fresh
synopsis
The approval status is submitted to HOD who
Fifth &
Approval Status will officially give concurrence for the execution
Sixth week
of the Project

Synopsis: Three page hard copy to be submitted to the HOD with the signatures of the
Guide and the student
Page 1 Title, Contact Address of student- with details of Internal and External Guide (if
applicable).
Page 2 Short introduction with objectives and summary (300 words). Review of
Articles / Literature about the topic with source of information.
Page 3 Time Activity Chart.

Schedule to be followed during Project work

Activity Timeline Remarks
Understanding Structure, Culture
and functions of the organization
1st Student should understand products/services and the
/identifying of business problem
of Project problems of the organization.
from the Industry from the literature
study
Preparation of Research design and Discussion with the guide for finalization of research
2nd week
Research instrument for data design and instrument in his/her domain and present
of Project
collection the same to the guide. (First Presentation).
Date collected to be edited, coded, tabulated and
3rd week of
Data collection presented to the guide for suggestions for analysis.
Project
(Second Presentation).
Students must use appropriate and latest statistical
4th & 5th week tools and techniques for analyzing the data. (It is must
Analysis and finalization of report
of project to use of Statistical Package whose result should be
shown in the report) (Third Presentation).
Final Report should be submitted to the University
6th week of
Submission of Report before one week of the commencement of theory
Project
examination.
01.02.2023

Formats for Project Report and Evaluation

 Format of Cover Page
 Format of certificate by Company/Institution or from both
 Format of Declaration Page
 Format of Contents
 Format of List of Tables and Charts
 Format of Bibliography
 Format for Internal Evaluation, External Evaluation and Viva voce
01.02.2023

(Title of the Report)

Submitted by

(Student Name)
(USN)

Submitted to

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELGAVI

In partial fulfillment of the requirements for the award of the degree of

MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Under the guidance of

INTERNAL GUIDE EXTERNAL GUIDE

(Name & Designation) (Name & Designation)

(Institute Logo)

Department of MBA

(Institute Name with Address)

(Month & Year of submission)

01.02.2023

CERTIFICATE

This is to certify that (Name of the Student) bearing USN (xxxx), is a bonafide student of Master
of Business Administration course of the Institute (Batch), affiliated to Visvesvaraya
Technological University, Belgaum. Project report on “(Title of Report)”is prepared by Him/her
under the guidance of (Name of the Guide), in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the
award of the degree of Master of Business Administration of Visvesvaraya Technological
University, Belagavi Karnataka.

Signature of Internal Guide Signature of HOD Signature of Principal

DECLARATION
I, (Student Name), hereby declare that the Project report entitled “(Title)” with reference to
―(Organization with place) prepared by me under the guidance of (Guide Name), faculty of
M.B.A Department, (Institute name) and external assistance by (External Guide Name,
Designation and Organization). I also declare that this Project work is towards the partial
fulfillment of the university Regulations for the award of degree of Master of Business
Administration by Visvesvaraya Technological University, Belagavi. I have undergone a
summer project for a period of Twelve weeks. I further declare that this Project is based on the
original study undertaken by me and has not been submitted for the award of any degree/diploma
from any other University / Institution.

Place: Signature of the Student

Date:

Table of Contents
Sl.No. Contents Page No’s.
Executive Summary
Chapter-1 Introduction XXXXXXXXXXX
Chapter-2 Industry and Company profile XXXXXXXXXXX
Chapter-3 Theoretical Background of the Study XXXXXXXXXXX
Chapter-4 Data Analysis and interpretation XXXXXXXXXXX
Chapter-5 Summary of Findings, suggestions and Conclusion XXXXXXXXXXX
Bibliography
Annexures

List of Tables
Sl.No Particulars Page No’s.
1 Table showing ABC Analysis XXXXX
2 Table showing FSN Analysis XXXXX

List of Figures/ Charts/ Graphs

Sl.No. Particulars Page No’s.
1 Graph showing ABC Analysis XXXXX
2 Graph showing FSN Analysis XXXXX
01.02.2023